City of Hutchinson Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
Hutchinson, Kansas
Project Manual Volume I of I Bid Documents to Division 1 - Division 32 Construction Documents
July 2018
900 E. 27th Ave. Hutchinson, Kansas 67502 620.665.3952 fax 620.665.6543
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 00 01 01 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE
1.1 PROJECT MANUAL
A. Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. 6 Emerson Loop Hutchinson, Kansas 67501.
C. Architect Project No. 171377H
D. BG Consultants, Inc.
900 E. 27th Ave.
Hutchinson, Kansas, 67502
E. Phone: 785.537.7448
F. Fax: 785.537.8793
G. Web Site: www.bgcons.com.
H. Issued: July 2018
I. Copyright (2018 BG Consultants, Inc.) All rights reserved.
END OF SECTION 00 01 01
PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 01 01 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE
1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD
A. Architect:
1. Clint Hibbs, AIA 2. Kansas #5892. 3. Responsible for Divisions 01-49 Sections except where indicated as prepared by other design professionals of record.
B. Structural Engineer:
1. Johnny Eclavea. 2. Kansas #22363.
C. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing Engineer:
1. Jarrod Mann. 2. Kansas #17942.
D. Civil Engineer
1. Sid Arpin 2. Kansas #9144.
SEALS PAGE 00 01 07 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
END OF SECTION 00 01 07
SEALS PAGE 00 01 07 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
000000 COVER PAGE 000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000107 SEALS PAGE 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 SUMMARY 012300 ALTERNATES 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
033000 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 05 – METALS (NOT USED) DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 066400 PLASTIC PANELING
DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES 074646 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 079200 JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 085200 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
092900 GYPSUM BOARD 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 099000 PAINT AND COATING
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 096513 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 099000 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 104400 WALL MOUNTED SIGN 104416 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED) DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (NOT USED) DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL (NOT USED) DIVISION 17 -- RESERVED DIVISION 18 -- RESERVED DIVISION 19 -- RESERVED DIVISION 20 -- RESERVED DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) (NOT USED) DIVISION 24 -- RESERVED DIVISION 25 -- INTEGRATED AUTOMATION DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL (SEE DIVISION 16) DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 29 -- RESERVED DIVISION 30 -- RESERVED DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
311000 SITE CLEANING 312000 EARTH MOVING 313116 TERMITE CONTROL 321313 CONCRETE PAVING 329200 TURFS AND GRASSES 331113 PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 333113 PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING
DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED) DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (NOT USED) DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION (NOT USED) DIVISION 35 -- WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 36 -- RESERVED DIVISION 37 -- RESERVED DIVISION 38 -- RESERVED DIVISION 39 -- RESERVED DIVISION 40 -- PROCESS INTEGRATION (NOT USED) DIVISION 41 -- MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 42 -- PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 43 -- PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 44 -- POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 45 -- INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 46 -- WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 47 -- RESERVED DIVISION 48 -- ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION (NOT USED) DIVISION 49 -- RESERVED
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 3 . BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 00 01 15 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS
A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the bound drawing set.
B. Drawings shall be complimentary to each other and what is reasonably inferred from one drawing shall apply to another whether or not specifically called out.
C. Work or material called for by Drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, shall be fully executed and performed the same as if mentioned in both specifications and shown on the Drawings.
D. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated:
1. Manhattan-Ogden USD 383 – College Hill Preschool Phase II Improvements
G101 Cover Sheet G102 General Information G103 Partition Types and Accessibility Details G104 Code Information C100 Survey Controls C200 Site Layout C300 Grading Plan S000 Structural General Notes and Foundation Details S100 Foundation Plan S200 Structural Floor Plan S300 Structural Framing Plan S400 Structural Details S401 Structural Details S402 Structural Details S403 Structural Details A101 First Floor Plan A111 Roof Plan & Details A121 Reflected Ceiling Plans A201 Exterior Elevations A301 Building Sections A302 Wall Sections and Details AF101 Finish Plan, Details and Openings Schedule ME100 Site Plan P100 Plumbing Plan M100 Floor Plans – Mechanical M200 Mechanical Details M300 Mechanical Schedules E100 Floor Plans – Electrical E200 Electrical Details E300 Electrical Schedules ME200 MEP Specifications
END OF SECTION 00 01 15
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 01 15 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work under separate contracts. 8. Work restrictions. 9. Specification and drawing conventions. 10. Miscellaneous provisions.
1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Exterior Window Improvements- Lee Elementary School Annex.
1. Project Location: 6 Emerson Loop, Hutchinson, Kansas 67501.
B. Owner: City of Hutchinson 125 E Avenue B, Hutchinson, Kansas 67501.
1. Owner's Representative: Justin Combs, Director of Parks and Facilities.
C. Architect: BG Consultants, Inc. 4806 Vue Du Lac Place, Manhattan, Kansas 66503.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. New construction of a 2,100 square foot single-story type V-B building, multi-purpose education and rental space, animal holding facility, office, and support spaces. Structure is designed for future additions. Limited site improvements including sidewalks, exterior animal holding area, and paved education patio.
B. Type of Contract.
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. Before commencing Work, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work.
SUMMARY 011000 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.6 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B. Limit Use of Site and Premises to allow the following: 1. Owner occupancy at surrounding facilities. 2. Use of Site and premises by other work contracts. 3. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas affected by the work only 4. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing adjacent building(s). Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
1.8 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Concrete sidewalk construction outside of building. Fence improvements to be performed by City of Hutchinson, unless otherwise noted.
1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
SUMMARY 011000 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. a. Weekend Hours: As permitted by the Owner. b. Early Morning Hours: As permitted by the Owner. c. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: As permitted by the Owner. d. Hours for noisy activity: As permitted by the Owner.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.
1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
SUMMARY 011000 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Deduct - Plumbing. Base Bid: Above grade plumbing installation to be performed by the contractor.
ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
Alternate: Above grade plumbing installation to be performed by the city of Hutchinson. B. Alternate No. 2: Deduct - Mechanical. Base Bid: Mechanical installation to be performed by the contractor. Alternate: Mechanical installation to be performed by the city of Hutchinson. C. Alternate No. 3: Deduct – Electrical. Base Bid: Above grade electrical installation to be performed by the contractor. Alternate: Above grade electrical installation to be performed by the city of Hutchinson. D. Alternate No. 4: Addition – Overhead door upgrade. Base Bid: Overhead door to be OH-1 insulated steel sectional door. E. Alternate: Overhead door to be OH-2 aluminum and tempered glass sectional overhead door. F. Alternate No. 5: Addition – Doors upgrade. Base Bid: All interior door to be wood doors. Alternate: All interior doors to be hollow metal doors. G. Alternate No. 6: Addition – Education Room Casework. Base Bid: No installation of casework, stub and cap plumbing to this location. Alternate: Installation of casework and all associated plumbing.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form –Use CSI Form 13.1A 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:
a. Where proprietary products are specified either in the Construction Drawings or Specifications Manual substitutions shall evidence that they are superior to those products specified therein. In such instances equal products may not be accepted. b. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. c. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. d. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. e. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. f. Samples, where applicable or requested. g. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. h. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. i. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
j. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. k. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. l. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. m. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. n. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 15 days after the Notice of Award.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project Manual.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.
B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Work Change Directive: Architect through the Construction Manager may issue a Construction Work Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Work Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect through Construction Manager at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor’s construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. 5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 011000 “Summary.”
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of supplier. e. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. f. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five (5) percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items for project closeout requirements in an amount totaling two (2) percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work- in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Construction Manager and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Manager will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of preconstruction conference. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination requirement. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within fifteen (15) days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, and in temporary field office. Keep list current at all times.
1.4 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716, Form bound in Project Manual or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number, with not less than the following:
1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Contractor will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Sustainable design requirements. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
D. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. Owner expects shop submittals as soon as possible after Notice of Award. Contractor shall review the Construction Documents and Specifications and anticipate schedule need for submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. A lack of approval time due to negligence of the Contractor shall not be acceptable grounds for delay of the project schedule.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 20 days after date established for the Notice of Award.
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.
B. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.
C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.3 REPORTS
A. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect . 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use CSI Form 12.1A. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Contractor. 7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 9) Category and type of submittal. 10) Submittal purpose and description. 11) Specification Section number and title. 12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 14) Indication of full or partial submittal. 15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 17) Remarks. 18) Signature of transmitter.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS- 061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software or electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit (4) four sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
U. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International); www.astm.org. 35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com. 40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.com. 46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See ICC).
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bwfbadminton.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org. 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA). 73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com. 126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 128. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org. 142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 145. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org. 151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 155. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org. 162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com. 166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); www.tileusa.com. 183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC). 191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 192. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); www.wicnet.org. 201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA). 202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
203. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary sanitary facilities.
B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
C. Security requirements.
D. Vehicular access and parking.
E. Waste removal facilities and services.
F. Project identification sign.
1.2 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B. Use of existing facilities is not permitted.
C. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.3 BARRIERS
A. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against.
B. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.
C. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.4 FENCING
A. Construction: Contractor will be responsible to limit access to the environs from access to unauthorized persons and the public.
1.5 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
D. Parking: Only those vehicles and equipment required to complete the Work will be allowed on site. Use of the District’s property may be utilized with the following conditions:
1. Vehicles parked on District property are subject to all District parking regulations. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform all sub-contractors of parking arrangements. 3. The Contractor is responsible for the additional costs for any permits, and violations that may be incurred.
E. Cleanings services to be provided:
1. Power-wash street and sidewalks after Contractor's vehicles have left tracks on the way to or from the project site. Spud hoe up clods of dirt thrown from or crushed by tires, etc. and remove from site. Street sweep access routes used by Contractor and Subcontractors to edge of campus as well as provide follow up cleaning - broom and wash. 2. Remove stains from paved surfaces caused by rubber from tire tracks, oils, fuels, solvents, etc. 3. Pick up litter within project site and any litter within 50 feet of the School's side of the project site fence, along access routes, Contractor's storage yards and parking area. Debris to be placed in Contractor's trash containers. Contractor is responsible for all removal of construction debris. 4. Keep weeds and grasses in control every five (5) days within project site along and either side of project fence and in Contractor's parking/storage yards (use weed eater for cutting).
F. Contact Justin Combs, Director of Parks and Facilities, City of Hutchinson, 125 E Avenue B, Hutchinson, Kansas 67501 at telephone 620/694 26948 City of Hutchinson, or assistance in exploring the area(s) of work.
1.6 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT
A. Provide temporary walks, ramps, scaffolding, shoring, bracing and other equipment required for proper progress of Work and remove same at completion of Work.
B. Erect on site at location indicated.
1.7 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. Structural elements include the following:
a. Columns and Beams b. Load-bearing and sheer walls. c. Joists, trusses, and lintels.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
h. Fire-detection and –alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:
a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer’s written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in- place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond- core drill.
D. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
E. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
F. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.
G. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01 73 00
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 74 19 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 2. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 3. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 4. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
a. Project Name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect . d. Name of Contractor. e. Page Number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel and PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy.
1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within (15) fifteen days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked-up record prints or one digital PDF. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Submittal:
1) Submit two paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints or one digital PDF. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and two set(s) of prints. 3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Actual equipment locations. d. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Work Change Directive. e. Changes made following Architect’s written orders. f. Details not on the original Construction Documents. g. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information.
C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 033100 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers all concrete work as required to complete the concrete construction as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit the following product data.
1. Laboratory name
2. Aggregate testing and gradation
3. Design mix including previous test cylinder information
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and an air-entraining agent so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable mixture suitable for the specific conditions of placement. The work shall be performed in accordance with these specifications and in such a manner that completed items will conform to lines, grades and elevations as shown on the plans.
2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT
A. Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I. Cement may be bagged or bulk. Cement shall be used from only one mill throughout the entire project.
2.3 AGGREGATES
A. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and have the following gradation:
Sieve % Passing % Retained 3/8” 100 0 #4 95-100 0-5 #8 80-100 0-20 #16 50-85 15-50 #30 25-60 40-75 #50 5-30 70-95 #100 0-10 90-100
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Coarse Aggregate: Course aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and have the following gradation:
Sieve % Passing % Retained 3/4” 90-100 0-10 3/8” 20-55 45-80 #4 0-10 90-100 #8 0-5 95-100
2.4 WATER
A. Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of sewage, oil, acid, strong alkalies or vegetable matter. Treated and filtered water from a municipal or other public water supply district shall be used.
2.5 CALCIUM CHLORIDE
A. Calcium Chloride for use in curing concrete, when approved by the Engineer, shall conform to the Standard Specifications for Calcium Chloride, ASTM. D 98-34, or the latest edition.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. All reinforcement bars for concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 60. Bending details shall conform to ACI 318.
B. All welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to ASTM 185-37.
C. All wire for concrete reinforcement shall conform to specifications for cold drain steel wire for concrete reinforcement (ASTM A82).
2.7 FORMS
A. The forms shall be true and rigid and conform to shape, line and dimensions as shown on the Drawings. All forms shall be rigidly constructed, braced and tied to prevent any deflection or displacement during placing of concrete. All exposed corners and edges shall have 1” fillets. All joints shall be mortar tight; open joints shall be sealed as required.
2.8 NONSHRINK GROUT
A. Nonshrink Grout shall create water and gas tight seals in concrete openings for applications as specified in the plans. Grout shall be prepackaged natural aggregate requiring only the addition of water. Minimum strength of Grout is 12,000 psi at 28 days. Acceptable Manufacturer: Dayton Superior Corp., Miamisburg, OH; 1107 Advantage Grout or Approved Equal.
2.9 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties:
1. 4000 PSI 28-day compressive strength; 600 lbs cement per cu. yard minimum; W/C ratio: 0.46 maximum, foundations and building frames. Provide 6% air entrained at foundations or building frame if exposed to freeze-thaw.
2. 4000 PSI 28-day compressive strength; 600 lbs cement per cu. yard minimum; W/C ratio:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
0.44 maximum, 6% air entrained at exterior slabs.
3. 4000 PSI 28-day compressive strength; 600 lbs cement per cu. yard minimum; W/C ratio: 0.48 maximum, no air entrainment at interior slabs.
4. Slump: The slump of concrete shall not exceed 4" (unless specified otherwise) as tested according to method of test for slump of Portland Cement Concrete (ASTM C 143).
5. Mixing: Contractor shall use ready-mixed concrete, mixed and delivered in conformance with ASTM C143 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6. Admixture: Air entraining agents shall be added to the concrete to provide 4 to 7 percent entrained air when placed, in conformance with ASTM C185.
7. Admixture: Corrosion Inhibitor shall be added to the concrete (DCI by GRACE Construction Products or approved equal). a. Recommended addition rate range shall be from 2.0 to 6.0 gal/yd3. (As recommended by manufacturer) b. Reduce Mix water to account for water in additive using the adjustment factor of 7.0 lb./gal of additive.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL
A. All bars are to be accurately placed and securely tied at all intersections.
B. Reinforcing steel shall be free from flaky or scaly rust which will destroy or reduce the bond strength at the time concrete is placed.
C. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the following minimum concrete coverage shall be maintained:
1. Against earth: 3”
2. Against forms or when exposed to water or weather: 1-1/2”
D. Splicing: Where splices in reinforcement, in addition to those indicated, are necessary, there shall be sufficient lap to transfer the stress by bonds, as may be directed. Bars shall be lapped not less than 40 diameters and splices shall be staggered.
E. All reinforcement shall be secured in place, true to the lines and grades indicated, by the use of metal or concrete supports, spacers or ties. Such supports shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the reinforcement in place throughout the concreting operation, and shall be used in such manner that they will not be exposed on face of, nor in any way discolor or be noticeable in the surface of the finished concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Install embedded items including those furnished by other trades, crafts or Contractors prior to placing concrete. Embedded items shall be free of oil, rust, scale or other foreign matter. Kerf and thoroughly soak wood strips used to form grooves, key joints and bevels.
3.3 FORMS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
A. Construction: Responsibility for form construction adequacy shall rest with the Contractor. Bolts and rods used for internal ties shall be so arranged that when the forms are removed all metal will not be less than two (2) inches from any concrete surface. Wire ties will not be permitted where concrete surface will be exposed to weathering and discoloration will be objectionable. All forms shall be so constructed that they can be removed without hammering or prying against the concrete.
B. Coating: Forms, other than those having absorptive form lining for exposed surfaces shall be coated with a non-staining mineral oil which shall be applied shortly before the concrete is placed.
C. Removal: The removal of forms shall be accomplished in such a manner as will prevent injury to the concrete.
3.4 MIXING AND PLACING
A. Mixing Equipment: When approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may operate one or more approved batch-type mixing plants. The rated capacity of any individual mixer shall not be less than one sack. The plant or plants shall be provided with adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and control of all materials and water and for readily changing the proportion to conform to the varying conditions of the work, in order to produce concrete of the required uniform strength and workability.
B. Conveying: Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as practicable and by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. It shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position. Chutes used shall be such that the concrete slides in them and does not flow. Chutes, if permitted, shall have a slope of less than 1 on 2. Where a vertical drop of greater than five (5) feet is necessary, placement shall be through elephant trunks or similar devices to prevent segregation.
C. Placing: Concrete shall be placed before initial set has occurred and in no event after it has contained its water content for more than one (1) hour. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall be deposited upon clean, damp surfaces, free from running water, or upon properly consolidated fills, but never upon soft mud or dry porous earth. No concrete shall be placed on frozen sub-grade fill.
D. Vibration: Concrete shall generally be placed with the aid of mechanical vibrating equipment in conformance with ACI 309. Vibration shall be transmitted directly to the concrete and in no case shall it be transmitted through the forms. The duration of vibration at any location in the forms shall be held to the minimum necessary to produce through compaction.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Curing shall be maintained continuously for seven (7) days after placing concrete or until forms are removed and the surface finished. Concrete surface temperature is to be maintained between 50°F and 100°F.
B. Exposed Concrete: As soon as the surface of the concrete is finished, it shall be cured according to one of the following methods.
1. The finished concrete can be covered with damp burlap which shall be kept continuously damp, but not soaking wet for a period of 4 days. Structures which require the use of forms will be required to be left in place for 4 days.
2. The finished concrete on this project can be cured with curing compound under Subsection 1404 of the 2015 KDOT specifications. The curing compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
3. The finished concrete can be covered by a plastic sheet material such as a polyethylene film. This
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
film shall conform to ASTM C171.
C. Protection: Fresh concrete shall be adequately protected from heavy rains and mechanical injury. Rapid evaporation of water with resultant drying out of exposed surfaces shall be prevented. In cold weather, concrete shall be mixed and placed only when the temperature is at least 40°F and rising, in which event mixing water, or both mixing water and aggregates, shall be heated. In cold weather, suitable means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete surface at a temperature of at least 50°F during the entire seven (7) day curing period. Concreting operations during cold weather shall be continued ONLY with the specific authorization of the Engineer who may authorize special construction methods and the use of calcium chloride as an accelerator.
3.6 FINISHING
A. Unexposed Surfaces: Concrete for which no other finish is specified shall have fins and rough edges removed.
B. Surfaces Exposed to Sight or Weather: All unsightly ridges or lips shall be removed and local bulging shall be remedied by tooling and rubbing. All holes left by the removal of rods and all voids unless otherwise directed shall be reamed and filled with mortar.
C. Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, spalling or surface defects.
3.7 FIELD TESTING
A. Testing of aggregate for concrete shall be in accordance with the following.
1. Sieve Analysis of Aggregate – ASTM C136
a. The Contractor shall conduct ASTM C136 for every 250 tons of aggregate used in order to control product quality.
2. Material Passing No. 200 Sieve by the Wash Method – ASTM C117
a. The Contractor shall conduct ASTM C117 for every 250 tons of aggregate used in order to control product quality.
B. Slump, unit weight, and air content tests for concrete constitute one set of tests. Standard test methods for field testing shall be in accordance with the following.
1. Slump – ASTM C143
2. Unit Weight – ASTM C138
3. Air Content – ASTM C173 (Volumetric Method) or ASTM C231 (Pressure Method)
C. Frequency: The Contractor shall field test concrete for slump, unit weight and air content as needed to control product quality. One set of tests shall be conducted for every 50 cubic yards placed or major mix design change, as directed by the Engineer. Select initial sample from first two (2) or three (3) loads and then on a random basis or as conditions indicate.
3.8 TEST CYLINDERS
A. All concrete test cylinders shall be provided by the Contractor. The testing of test cylinders, including transportation, shall be paid for by the Contractor.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. The Contractor shall make at least three test cylinders for the first day’s pour and for each 50 cubic yards placed thereafter or for major mix design changes or as directed by the engineer.
C. The cylinders shall be cured and protected under job conditions and shall be delivered to the laboratory on the fourth day, where the laboratory shall proceed to cure until tested. The Contractor shall pay for the breaking of all test cylinders. One cylinder shall be tested on the seventh day, and the second cylinder shall be tested on the 28th day. The third test cylinder shall be tested if unsatisfactory results are obtained on the other test cylinders. The test cylinders shall be identified at the time cast, and as to which pour is represented. Unsatisfactory tests of cylinders shall make the concrete represented subject to rejection, with consequent removal and replacement required.
D. Concrete test cylinders shall be cast and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39. The testing laboratory shall furnish four copies of test reports for test cylinders and distributed as follows:
1. 2 copies – Engineer
2. 2 copies – Contractor
END OF SECTION 033100
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 06 10 53 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included: Install wood framing, sheathing, blocking, curbing, decking, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Provide wood, nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware, and other items required for rough and finish carpentry as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions of these Specifications.
B. Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specific requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Codes and standards:
1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by the Architect, comply with: a. "Product Use Manual" of the Western Wood Products Association for selection and use of products included in that manual. b. "Plywood Specifications and Grade Guide" of the American Plywood Association. c. "Product Use Manual" of the Southern Pine Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps
1. Identify framing lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, or such other grade stamps as is approved in advance by the Architect. 2. Identify plywood as to species, grade and give glue type by the stamp pf the American Plywood Association. 3. Identify other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency approved in advance by the Architect.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protection:
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Deliver the materials to the job site and store, in a safe area out of the way of traffic, and stored up off the ground surface. 2. Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each grade separately from other grades. 3. Protect metals with adequate waterproof outer wrapping. 4. Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting and breaking of materials.
B. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Supplemental Conditions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials in the quantities needed for the Work shown on the Drawings, and meeting or exceeding the following standards of quality:
1. Misc. 2x members: Fire treated, Standard or better, kiln dried, CCA treated when in contact w/concrete. 2. Plywood:
a. Wall Sheathing: Structural II, c-c; exterior, where shown on drawings.
3. Building papers: Kraft paper complying with Fed Spec UU-B-790A. 4. Rough hardware:
a. Steel items: (1) Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36 (2) Use galvanized at exterior locations b. Machine bolts: Comply with ASTM A307 c. Lag bolts: Comply with Fed Spec FF-B561 d. Nails:
(1) Use common except as otherwise noted. (2) Comply with Fed Spec FF-N-1 (3) Use galvanized at exterior locations
5. Exterior trim, fascia & skirt boards: S1S2E Western red cedar clear, natural species, AWI Premium Grade, kiln-dried, or suitable alternative.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
B. Provide ¾” fire-retardant treated plywood for Telecommunication Backboards.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
A. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.
B. Selection of lumber pieces:
1. Carefully select the members. 2. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections. 3. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function. 4. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
3.3 GENERAL FRAMING
A. General:
1. In addition to framing operations normal to the fabrication and erection indicated on the Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the work of other trades. 2. Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up. 3. Do not notch, cut, or bore members for pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other reasons except as shown on the Drawings or as specifically approved in advance by the Architect.
B. Bearings:
1. Make bearings full unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Finish bearing surfaces on which structural members are to rest so as to give sure and even support. 3. Where framing members slope, cut or notch the ends as required to give uniform bearing surface. 4. Provide double studs at all stud bearing walls supporting two floors and a roof. 5. Header Schedule: a. Use #2 Southern Pine or Douglas Fir lumber with a minimum Fb = 1,250 psi. b. Header shall be as noted on the plans.
3.4 BLOCKING
A. Install blocking as required to support items of finish and to cut off concealed draft openings, both vertical and horizontal, between ceiling and floor areas.
B. Wood blocking at roof locations is to be untreated wood.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.5 ALIGNMENT
A. On framing members to receive a finished surface, along the finish subsurface to vary not more than 1/8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing members.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SHEATHING
A. Placement:
1. Place plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports and continuously over at least two supports, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Center joints accurately over supports, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3. Install plywood clips as specified. 4. Plywood sheathing and blocking at roof locations to be untreated.
B. Protect plywood from moisture by use of waterproof coverings until the plywood in turn has been covered with the next succeeding component or finish.
3.7 FASTENING
A. Nailing:
1. Use only common wire nails or spikes, except where otherwise specifically noted on the Drawings. 2. Nail without splitting wood. 3. Pre-bore as required. 4. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified requirements.
B. Bolting:
1. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. 2. Drill straight and true from one side only. 3. Do not bear bolts threads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
C. Screws:
1. For lag screws and wood screws, pre-bore holes same diameter as root of threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank. 2. Screw, do not drive, lag screws and wood screws.
END OF SECTION 06 10 53
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.
1.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 4. Edges: Grade HGS. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for doors and fixed panels, horizontally for drawer fronts.
G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.
I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2. Match Architect's sample. 3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. c. Wood grains, matte finish. d. Patterns, matte finish.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.
B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows:
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100.
D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
F. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: HAFELE No. 282.11.710 on 32mm centers.
H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 2. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high, but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1. 4. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.
I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. Subparagraphs below are examples only. Revise to suit Project. If more than one finish is required, insert location of each here or indicate on Drawings. See the Evaluations.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to Suite Application.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.
B. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.
C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer- head cabinet installation screws.
D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) using concealed shims.
1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
END OF SECTION 06 41 16
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 06 64 00 - PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic sheet paneling.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). 3. Surface Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.
1. Color: Match panels
B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
PLASTIC PANELING 06 64 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.
B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C. Install trim accessories with in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.
E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
END OF SECTION 06 64 00
PLASTIC PANELING 06 64 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Research reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Guardian Building Products, Inc. c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. d. Knauf Insulation.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building paper. 2. Building wrap. 3. Flexible flashing. 4. Drainage material.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. DuPont Building Innovations: E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. c. Kingspan Insulation. d. Ludlow Coated Products. e. Raven Industries, Inc.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 75 perms (4300 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. DuPont Building Innovations: E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. c. Protecto Wrap Company.
B. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. c. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp. d. Fortifiber Building Systems Group. e. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. f. MFM Building Products Corp. g. Polyguard Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. Install drainage material over building wrap and flashing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 25 00
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Ridge vents. 4. Metal flashing and trim.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Evaluation reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail within specified warranty period.
1. Material Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds of up to 130 mph (58 m/s) for 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Workmanship Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for Class A fire resistance according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Three-Tab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462/D 3462M, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing; with tabs regularly spaced, or match existing on site shingle. 1. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Algae Resistance: Granules resist algae discoloration. 3. Impact Resistance: UL 2218, Class 4. 4. Color and Blends: Match Architect's sample.
B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.
1. Type: Type I.
2.4 RIDGE VENTS (OPTIONAL)
A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV- stabilized plastic ridge vent for use under ridge shingles.
1. Minimum Net Free Area: 3.5.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5- mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing.
1. Shank: Barbed. 2. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.
C. Felt-Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Sheet Metal: Anodized aluminum, Aluminum, mill finished.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt- underlayment roofing nails.
1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction that sheds water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (150 mm) over self- adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c.
C. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- (485-mm-) wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses 19 inches (485 mm) in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt-underlayment roofing nails.
1. Apply a continuous layer of asphalt roofing cement over starter course and on felt- underlayment surface to be concealed by succeeding courses as each felt course is installed. Apply over entire roof at locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction that sheds water. 3. Terminate felt underlayment flush extended up not less than 4 inches (100 mm)] against sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projections. 4. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch (914 mm) o.c.
3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems."
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.3 ASPHALT-SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and recommendations in NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt-shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.
1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge.
C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.
D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.
E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses.
F. Fasten asphalt-shingle strips with a minimum of four roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Where roof slope exceeds 21:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails. 2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C), seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.
G. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point.
1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open-valley flashings.
H. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
I. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.
END OF SECTION 07 31 13
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 31 13 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 07 46 46 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fiber-cement siding and soffit.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For fiber-cement siding and soffit including related accessories.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
D. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm).
D. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 6-1/4 to 6-1/2 inches (159 to 165 mm) wide in plain style.
1. Texture: Wood Grain.
E. Panel Texture: 48-inch- (1200-mm-) wide sheets with smooth texture.
F. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.
2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm).
C. Pattern: [24-inch- (600-mm-)] wide sheets with smooth texture, vented & non-vented.
D. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration, or as shown on plans. 1. Trim Board, Ext, Engineered Wood 3-1/2" 2. Trim Board, Ext, Engineered Wood 6" 3. Trim, Panel Edge Cover Ext, Engineered Wood 2" 4. Corner Trim, Ext, Engineered Wood 5. Trim Board, Ext, Engineered Wood 3-1/2", Openings
B. Flashing: Provide flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.
C. Fasteners:
1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate. 2. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.
D. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh.
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07 46 46
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING 07 46 46 - 3 . BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of finish for each item. 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and expansion- joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. As-Milled Finish: Mill. 2. Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing alloy on both sides, forming aluminum sheet with reflective luster. 3. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is required, pretreat metal with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm). 4. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
5. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Surface: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
2.4 MANUFACTURED REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure- treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
3.2 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 5 . BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Roof-edge drainage systems.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.2 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25 mm) above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion- joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. 2. Gutter Profile: Style K according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters.
B. Downspouts: Corrugated rectangular complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
C. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer or Three-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.
ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Coil-Coated Aluminum Sheet Finishes:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. c. Two-Coat Mica Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. d. Three-Coat Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish with suspended metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.
C. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
D. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
3.2 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 18 inches (457.2 mm) apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet (15.2 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps. 2. Install continuous leaf guards on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.
END OF SECTION 07 71 00
ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and joint backing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.
B. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
C. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
D. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
G. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of the Supplemental Conditions.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.
JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install sealers under conditions recommended by the sealant manufacturer during installation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of the Supplemental Conditions.
B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section and detailed as requiring sealant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. For exterior building joints, window perimeters, sealing of flashings, etc., polyurethane sealant. Colors as selected by Architect. 1. Dymeric, as manufactured by Tremco. 2. Sonolastic NP 2, as manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000.
B. For interior building joints, window and door perimeters, etc., acrylic latex caulk. Colors selected by Architect. 1. AC-20, as manufactured by Pecora. 2. Sonolac, as manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Mono, as manufactured by Tremco. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-stain type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. For fire rated walls use only approved backing as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Bond Break: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Tool joints concave.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of the Supplemental Conditions.
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of the Supplemental Conditions.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than 0.50 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. (2.84 W/K x sq. m) when tested according to ASTM C 518.
2.2 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1; SDI A250.4, Level C. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch (0.8 mm). Provide metallic-coated door at 106.1 only. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). Provide metallic-coated at door 106.1 only.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2; SDI A250.4, Level B. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep- hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. h. Core: Manufacturer's standard, insulated.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. b. Construction: Face welded, insulated.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches (610 mm) of frame height above 7 feet (2.1 m). 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.
B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.
C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment.
D. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.
1. Sidelite Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding, or by rigid mechanical anchors.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.
D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 840.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 841 and NAAMM-HMMA guide specification indicated.
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 . BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Hollow-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
C. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through- bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
E. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw- holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
F. Hollow-Core Doors:
1. Construction: Standard hollow core.
2.2 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: [Premium, with Grade A faces] 2. Species: White Maple 3. Cut: Plain Sliced 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: [Book] match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: [Center-balance] match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening 7. Core: [Either glued or non-glued wood stave or structural composite lumber]. 8. Construction: [Five or seven] plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123" Interior Painting."
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" 3. Finish: [WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish] [or] [WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane] 4. Staining: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 5. Sheen: [Satin]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
END OF SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified.
C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, [Type 304] [Type 316]. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
E. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.
C. Latch and Lock Hardware:
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 2. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.
a. Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes [manually] [electrically] operated sectional doors.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [Two] [Five] years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.
B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.
1. Design Wind Load: [As indicated on Drawings] 2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330[ or DASMA 108 for garage doors and complying with the acceptance criteria of DASMA 108]
C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide[ glazed] sectional doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to local jurisdictional requirements.
D. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7]
2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Steel (oh-1) or full-vision aluminum (oh-2) insulated Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of [0.4 cfm/sq. ft. (2.03 L/s per sq. m)]
C. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)] zinc coating. 1. Exterior-Face Surface: [Flat] 2. Interior Facing Material: [hardboard panel] [or] [manufacturer's standard material]
D. Aluminum Sections: [Full vision]
E. Track Configuration: [Contour] track.
F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top [and around entire perimeter] of door.
G. Locking Devices: Equip door with [locking device assembly] [and] [chain lock keeper].
1. Locking Device Assembly: [Single-jamb side] locking bars, operable from [inside and outside, with cylinders]
H. Manual Door Operator: [Push-up operation]
I. Door Finish:
1. Aluminum Finish: [Anodized color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] 2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: [Color and gloss as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] 3. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 4. Finish of Interior Facing Material: [Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.3 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS
A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet.
1. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weather-resistant seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door.
B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart.
C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal.
D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place.[ Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.]
E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
F. Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections and the interior facing material, with no exposed insulation.
2.4 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS
A. Sections: Extruded-aluminum stile and rail members with dimensions and profiles as indicated on Drawings; members joined by welding or with concealed, aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door section; and with meeting rails shaped to provide a weather- resistant seal.
1. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading.[ Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.] 2. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
B. Full-Vision Sections: Manufacturer's standard, tubular, aluminum-framed section fully glazed with 6- mm-thick, clear acrylic glazing set in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel and with removable extruded-vinyl or aluminum stops.
2.5 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings, Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support of ball- bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading.
1. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device.
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.
C. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type, size, and in arrangement indicated. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames.
2.6 HARDWARE
A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails.
C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.
D. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up operated or emergency-operated door with galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.
2.7 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders [standard with manufacturer] [and keyed to building keying system]. 2. Keys: [Three] for each cylinder.
C. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.
B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft.
C. Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables.
D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.
F. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
2.9 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.
B. Push-up Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed [25 lbf (111 N)]
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.
C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
D. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.
END OF SECTION 083613
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 5 . BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 08 52 00 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All labor, materials, tools, equipment and services needed to furnish and install Architectural Performance Class windows. 2. Components furnished with installed windows. 3. Installation accessories furnished and installed.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General Requirements
1. Provide all submittals in a timely manner to meet the required construction completion schedule.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings must be prepared wholly by the window manufacturer, or a qualified engineering services firm under the direction of the manufacturer. Shop drawings for pre- engineered configurations may be prepared by installers authorized per 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE. 2. Provide design details along with bid proposals to define system aesthetic and functional characteristics. 3. Provide three photocopied sets of shop drawings, including half size details of all necessary conditions.
C. Samples
1. Components: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware, assembled corner sections and other materials and components as requested by Architect. 2. Finish: Submit color samples for Architect's approval as requested.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Upon request, the window manufacturer will provide written confirmation that the installer is authorized to install window products to be used on this project.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Materials will be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored and protected in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Aluminum Window Warranty
1. Products: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, for a period of 2 years (10 years for insulated glass seal failure) from the date of manufacture, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements and industry standards, which results in premature failure of the windows, finish, factory-glazed glass, or parts, outside of normal wear. a. In the event that windows or components are found defective, manufacturer will repair or provide replacements without charge at manufacturer’s option. b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer (non-pass through) and non-prorated for the entire term. Warranty must be assignable to the non- residential owner, and transferable to subsequent owners through its length. 2. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements, which result in premature failure. a. In the event that installation of windows or components is found to be defective, installer will repair or provide replacements without charge at the installer’s option.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer
1. Drawings and specifications are based on: a. Manko Window Systems, Inc. 800 Series Fixed/Project Out Window. 1) Base bid will be Manko Window Systems, Inc.
B. Substitutions
1. Other manufacturers’ products that meet or exceed specified design requirements may be considered. Submit the following information with request for substitutions at least ten (10) working days prior to bid date. a. Full proposal details and samples specified in 1.03 SUBMITTALS b. Copy of manufacturer's warranty specified in 1.06 WARRANTY c. Other information as requested for evaluation 2. Substitute products not pre-approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members
1. Extruded aluminum prime billet 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 alloy for primary components; 6063-T5, 6063-T6, or 6061-T6 for structural components; all meeting the requirements of ASTM B221. 2. Aluminum sheet alloy 5005 H 32 (for anodic finish), meeting the requirements of ASTM B209 or alloy 3003 H 14 (for painted or unfinished sheet).
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Materials
1. Principal window frame members will be a minimum 0.094" in thickness at all structural areas, hardware mounting webs, and section flanges. 2. Extruded or formed trim components will be a minimum 0.062" in thickness.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. All steel components including attachment fasteners to be 300 series stainless steel except as noted.
B. Extruded aluminum components 6063-T5 or 6063-T6.
C. Locking handles, cases and strikes to be die cast or stainless steel.
D. Thermoplastic or thermo-set plastic caps, housings and other components to be injection-molded nylon, extruded PVC, or other suitable compound.
E. Hardware:
1. Fixed -- No Hardware Required
F. Sealants
1. All sealants shall comply with applicable provisions of AAMA 800 and/or Federal Specifications FS-TT-001 and 002 Series. 2. Frame joinery sealants shall be suitable for application specified and as tested and approved by window manufacturer.
G. Glazing
1. Provide in general accordance with Section 08800. 2. Glazing method shall be in general accordance with the FGMA Glazing Manual for specified glass type, or as approved by the glass fabricator.
H. Glazing Materials
1. Setting Blocks/Edge Blocking: Provide in sizes and locations recommended by FGMA Glazing Manual. 2. Back-bedding tapes, expanded cellular glazing tapes, toe beads, heel beads and cap beads shall meet the requirements of applicable specifications cited in AAMA 800. 3. Glazing gaskets shall be non-shrinking, weather-resistant, and compatible with all materials in contact. 4. Structural silicone sealant where used shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1184. 5. Spacer tape in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be tested for compatibility and approved by the sealant manufacturer for the intended application. Gaskets in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be extruded silicone or compatible material.
I. Steel Components
1. Concealed steel anchors and reinforcing shall be factory painted after fabrication with rust- inhibitive primer complying with Federal Specification TT-P-645.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
J. Thermal Break Construction:
1. Frame and sash members must include a thermal break applied in the manufacturer’s facility, using concealed low conductance poured-in-place polyurethane in a pre-treated cavity. 2. After proper curing, the aluminum bridge section must be removed to provide a 1/4” separation between exterior and interior metal surfaces.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Finish, fabricate and shop assemble frame and sash members into complete windows under the responsibility of one manufacturer. 2. No bolts, screws or fastenings to bridge thermal barrier or impair independent frame movement. 3. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subjected to a temperature differential from -30 degrees F to +180 degrees F.
B. Frames:
1. Cope and mechanically fasten each corner, or miter all corners and mechanically stake over a solid extruded aluminum corner key leaving only hairline joinery, then seal weather tight.
C. Main Sash Ventilator
1. Miter all corners and mechanically stake over a solid extruded aluminum corner key, leaving only hairline joinery, then seal weather tight.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Finish of Aluminum Components
1. Finish of all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components shall be done in accordance with the appropriate AAMA Voluntary Guide Specification shown.
Designation Description Standard Color AAM12C21A44 Organic Paint AAMA 2603 As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors – Suitable for INTERIOR Finishes
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions
1. Verify that building substrates permit installation of windows according to the manufacturer's instructions, approved shop drawings, calculations and contract documents. 2. Do not install windows until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erection of Aluminum Windows
1. Install windows with skilled tradesman in exact accordance with approved shop drawings, installation instructions, specifications, and AAMA 101/I.S.2. 2. Windows must be installed plumb, square and level for proper weathering and operation. Jambs must not be “sprung”, bowed or warped during installation. 3. Aluminum that is not organically coated shall be insulated from direct contact with steel, masonry, concrete or other dissimilar metals by bituminous paint, zinc chromate primer, nonconductive shims or other suitable insulating material.
END OF SECTION 08 52 00
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 52 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the project site.
B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at the project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified.
C. Door hardware schedule.
D. Keying schedule.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.
C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design".
2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule.
1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3.
2.3 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) or 1.25-inch (32-mm) bolt throw.
C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim:
1. Description: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
G. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 2; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.
2.5 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
B. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
C. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
2.6 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.
2.7 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
2.8 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.9 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset.
1. Core Type: Interchangeable.
C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
D. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.11 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:
a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.
2.12 OPERATING TRIM
A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.
2.13 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release; and with internal override.
B. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
C. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.14 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
2.15 CONCEALED CLOSERS
A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
2.16 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.
2.17 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.
2.18 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E 283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa), as follows:
1. Smoke-Rated Gasketing: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) of door opening. 2. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) of door opening. 3. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of door opening.
2.19 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
2.20 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
2.21 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: BHMA A156.14; complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.22 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
2.23 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
2.24 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Basis of Design Schlage Hardware or Equivalent
A. Group A Hardware: Exterior Single Public 1. Push/Pull 2. Entrance Lockset 3. RIM Exit Device 4. (3) 1 ½” Pair Hinges 5. Threshold 6. Sweeps 7. Weather Stripping
B. Group B Hardware: Exterior Single Private 1. Lever Handle 2. Entrance/Office Lockset 3. (3) 1 ½” Pair Hinges 4. Threshold 5. Sweeps 6. Weather Stripping
C. Group C Hardware: Interior Privacy 1. Lever Handle 2. Privacy Lockset 3. (3) 1 ½” Pair Hinges 4. Wall Stop 5. Silencers
D. Group D Hardware: Interior Storage 1. Lever Handle 2. Storeroom Lockset 3. (3) 1 ½” Pair Hinges 4. Wall Stop 5. Silencers
E. Group E Hardware: Interior Office 1. Lever Handle 2. Office Lockset 3. (3) 1 ½” Pair Hinges 4. Wall Stop 5. Silencers 6. Smoke Seal 7. Closer
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
F. Group F Hardware: Interior Double Storage 1. Lever Handle 2. Office Lockset 3. (3) 1 ½” Pair Hinges 4. Wall Stop 5. Silencers 6. Smoke Seal
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 08 80 00 – GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES
A. Glazing for hollow metal, detention hollow metal, aluminum framing, and doors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 085200 – Aluminum Windows
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z97.1 - Specifications for Safety Performance of Glazing in Buildings.
B. ASTM E773 Seal Durability of Insulating Glass Units.
C. FGMA - Glazing Manual.
D. FGMA - Sealant Manual.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data on Glass Types and Glazing Compounds: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
B. Certify that glazing meets or exceeds specified requirements.
C. Samples: Submit one sample of 6x6 inch in size of each type, exampling glass units and coloration.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier.
B. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated frames.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide a (10) ten year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from sealed glass failure, interpane dusting and misting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.
C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
2.3 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Sealing System: Dual seal.
2.4 TEMPERED GLASS
A. Heat treated, uncoated, clear float glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3.
2.5 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they come in contact, under conditions of installation and service.
B. Suitability: Comply with the recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes under these applications.
C. Sealant Standards: Provide manufacturers standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer which complies with ASTM C920 requirements including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify that installations are clean and ready to receive work and dimensions are as required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install glazing with the glazing method that will produce the best overall installation and no workmanship difficulties, and provide for all warranties.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect glass from breakage after installation, and from coming in contact with contaminating substances.
B. Clean glass not more than four days prior to substantial completion. Remove non-permanent labels.
3.4 GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Sealed Insulating Glass: Glass located in all storefront framing.
1. Tint color: match lee elementary.
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
C. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.3 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Level 1: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099000 "Painting." And Coating
H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl base.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL BASE
A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).
1. Group: [I (solid, homogeneous)] [or] [II (layered)]. 2. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: [Provide in areas with resilient or hard surfaced floor coverings]
B. Minimum Thickness: [0.125 inch (3.2 mm)]
C. Height: [4 inches (102 mm)]
D. Lengths: [Coils in manufacturer's standard length]
E. Outside Corners: [Job formed or preformed].
F. Inside Corners: [Job formed or preformed].
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than [3 inches (76 mm)] in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than [3 inches (76 mm)] in length.
a. [Miter or cope] corners to minimize open joints.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 09 90 00 – PAINT AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, including that which is factory-finished. d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2008.
C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood- Base Materials; 2007.
PAINT AND COATING 09 90 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. Ref Drawings.
B. Paints:
1. Sherwin Williams or Benjamin Moore.
C. Transparent Finishes:
1. Sherwin Williams.
D. Stains:
1. Sherwin Williams.
PAINT AND COATING 09 90 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS – GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Colors: As indicated on drawings.
1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS – EXTERIOR
A. Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
B. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. Prime Coat: Red LEad Pigmented Primer. Primer is not required on items delivered shop primed. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
2.4 PAINT SYSTEMS – INTERIOR
A. Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain:
1. One coat of stain; oil base stain. 2. One coat sealer; oil base sealer. 3. Satin: One coat of varnish; oil base polyurethane varnish.
B. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with alkyd primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
C. Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
PAINT AND COATING 09 90 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
G. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried;
PAINT AND COATING 09 90 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.
H. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.
G. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 90 00
PAINT AND COATING 09 90 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PAINT AND COATING 09 90 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 10 14 19 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast dimensional characters. 2. Cutout dimensional characters. 3. Fabricated channel dimensional characters. 4. Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters. 5. Molded-plastic dimensional characters. 6. Illuminated, molded-plastic dimensional characters.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNS, GENERAL
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: For exterior, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Cutout Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth edges; precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. A.R.K. Ramos. b. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. c. APCO Graphics, Inc. d. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. e. Charleston Industries, Inc. f. Diskey Architectural Signage Inc. g. Gemini Incorporated. h. InPro Corporation (IPC). i. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. j. Metal Arts. k. Metallic Arts. l. Nelson-Harkins Industries. m. Southwell Company (The).
2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.
3. Character Height: As indicated. 4. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of character.
5. Mounting: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of recommended methods for wall assembly condition.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.
B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required.
1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to match sign-background color color unless otherwise indicated. 2. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets to match sign background finish unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned. 5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
END OF SECTION 10 14 19
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 19 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300 mm) long.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Material certificates.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [Five] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum [0.078-inch (2.0-mm)] wall thickness; in dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.
a. Color and Texture: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]
2. Continuous Retainer: [Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum] 3. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips. 4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Private-use bathroom accessories. 3. Warm-air dryers. 4. Childcare accessories. 5. Underlavatory guards.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [15] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Description: [Single-roll dispenser] 2. Mounting: [Surface mounted]. 3. Capacity: Designed for [4-1/2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-)] diameter tissue rolls. 4. Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)]
B. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser: 1. Mounting: [Surface mounted]. 2. Minimum Capacity: [400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels] 3. Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)] 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at sides or front.
C. Mirror Unit:
1. Frame: [Stainless-steel channel] a. Corners: [Manufacturer's standard] 2. Size: [As indicated on Drawings].
D. Coat Hook: 1. Description: [Double]-prong unit. 2. Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)]
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of [six] keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 10 44 00 – WALL MOUNTED SIGN
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall Mounted Frames.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities; 1998.
B. USATBCB - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior sign.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1 and ADAAG.
B. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of each sign type for evaluation of mounting techniques and application workmanship. 1. Locate in areas designated by Architect and Owner, Construction Manager, or Owner’s Representative. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Reinstall mock-up signs as required to produce acceptable work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in unopened protective packaging until ready for installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Vista System, which is located at: 1800 N. East Ave. Unit 102 ; Sarasota, FL 34234; Toll Free Tel: 800-468-4782; Tel: 941-365-4646; Fax: 888-316-5198; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.vistasystem.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
WALL MOUNTED SIGN 10 44 00 - 1
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 SIGNAGE
A. Products: Provide the following interior sign system types in the locations and configurations indicated. 1. Wall Mounted Frames: Wall mounted signs with the Vista frame extrusions using any flat, flexible substrate to create a curved-face sign. 2. Suspended Frames: Double sided Vista frame extrusions designed to be suspended as indicated.
B. Sign Substrates and Inserts 1. Raised Letter Signs with Braille and optional graphics on acrylic plastic (ADA Sign). a. Base Acrylic Material: 1) Sign material must have non-glare (matte) surface. a) Clear. 2) Sign Color: Color as selected. b. Edges: 1) Square to conform to sign frame interior space. c. Raised Characters: 1) Character Font: Helvetica. 2) Character Color: Black. 3) Character Thickness: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 4) Character Return Angle: 22 degrees. 5) Character Adhesive: 3M Scotch 467HP adhesive. d. Raised Graphics or Icons: 1) Graphic Color: Black. 2) Graphic Thickness: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3) Graphic Return Angle: 22 degrees. 4) Graphic Adhesive: 3M Scotch 467HP adhesive. e. Braille: 1) Grade II Raster Braille with domed surface.
2.3 WALL MOUNTED FRAMES
A. Wall Frames - Portrait Series: Extruded Aluminum of the sizes specified. This sign/product includes assembly. 1. Style/Size: a. V120, overall radius width is 4.72 inches (120 mm). Size 3.25 inches portrait height. b. V200, overall radius width is 7.87 inches (200 mm). Size 4 inch portrait height. c. V200, overall radius width is 7.87 inches (200 mm). Size 6 inch portrait height. d. V200, overall radius width is 7.87 inches (200 mm). Size 8 inch portrait height. 2. Aluminum Frame Finish: a. Silver, Clear Anodized. 3. Clear Cover for Extrusion: Thick polycarbonate, glossy one side, and non-glare one side. 4. End Caps for Extrusions: Provided with matching screws. a. Plastic (ABS). 1) Color: Black. b. Metal: Brushed Aluminum. 1) Finish: Black Anodized. 5. Mounting: a. Mechanical with all mounting holes predrilled. b. Double sided tape and silicone sealant.
WALL MOUNTED SIGN 10 44 00 - 2
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
c. Mechanical with primary mounting holes predrilled and set with silicone sealant.
2.4 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
2.5 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
2.6 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Locate signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and ADA requirements.
C. Install signs after surfaces to receive signage are finished.
2.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
2.8 SCHEDULES
Room Vista Systems Font/Size Mounting Copy/Remarks Room Name V200 Helvetica/1 inch Where Shown Room Name/Clear Face Black Letters
Room Number V120 Helvetica/1 inch Where Shown Room Number/Clear Face Black Letters
Restr ooms V200 Helvetica/1 inch Where Shown Graphic/Men, Women Clear Face Black Letters
Directional V150 Helvetica/3 inch Where Shown Arrow Graphic, Clear Face Black Letters
WALL MOUNTED SIGN 10 44 00 - 3
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WALL MOUNTED SIGN 10 44 00 - 4
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 10 44 16 – PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010.
B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. Ansul, Inc.: www.ansul.com. 2. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 4. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 5. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
10 44 16 - 1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure rigidly in place.
END OF SECTION 10 44 16
10 44 16 - 2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 31 10 00 – SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, removing site utilities and abandoning site utilities in place. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
B. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.
C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.
D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, may or may not be indicated on Drawings.
E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.
F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise shall remain the Owner's property. Cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.
1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain.
B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.
1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.
C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises as directed by the Engineer.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify One Call for area where Project is located before site clearing.
E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and any required plant-protection measures are in place.
F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Erection of sheds or structures. 4. Impoundment of water. 5. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 6. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.
G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
I. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Backfill Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory backfill soil material are specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.
B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79, Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer shall be required on all exposed concrete reinforcement.
1. Use coating with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 2
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Flag a 1-inch yellow vinyl tie tape flag around each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established according to local permits and drawings.
D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal once permanent vegetation has been established.
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by the Engineer.
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.
1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
B. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.
C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed in project drawings if required.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 3
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.
3.1 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B. It is strongly recommended that the contractor separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities when practical.
END OF SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 4
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 31 20 00 – EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers excavating, trenching, backfilling and grading for underground pipelines, and miscellaneous structures, together with all incidental work in connection therewith, including disposing of surplus and waste materials and finish grading.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 33 11 13 Public Water Utility Distribution Piping
B. Section 33 31 13 Public Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping
C. Section 32 92 00 Turfs and Grasses
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Information Submittals
1. Catalog and manufacturer’s data sheets for compaction equipment when requested by Engineer or Owner. 2. Certified test results from independent testing agency. These tests may include but not be limited to: a. The Standard Density Proctor Test b. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed. c. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Classification of Excavation
1. All excavation will be unclassified and the contractor shall remove all substances encountered in excavation and trenching to the designated limits and grades. No separate additional payment will be made for excavation, regardless of the nature, condition or moisture content of the materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Topsoil, and material required for structural backfill and trench backfill in excess of suitable material excavated from trenching and structural excavation shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 EMBANKMENT MATERIAL
A. Embankment material shall be excavated material from required excavations and designated borrow sites, free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials.
B. Material containing more than 10 percent gravel, stones, or shale particles is unacceptable.
C. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish Work.
2.3 SELECT MATERIAL
A. Select material shall be a sorted, job-excavated soil material as specified for embankment, except no rocks, stones, or lumps larger than one inch in largest dimension shall be present.
2.4 GRANULAR MATERIAL
A. Crushed Gravel
1. A well-graded crushed gravel conforming to ASTM Designation C33, Gradation 7 (1/2 inch to No. 4) or Kansas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, 2007 Edition for coarse aggregate CA-4 or CA-5.
CA-4 CA-5 Sieve Size % Passing Sieve Size % Passing ¾” 100 ¾” 95-100 ½” 70-100 ½” - 3/8” 40-70 3/8” 40-70 No. 4 0-25 No. 4 - No. 8 0-5 No. 8 0-5
B. Sand Material
1. Fill sand resulting from the disintegration of siliceous and/or calcareous rocks or manufactured sand produced by crushing predominantly siliceous materials or a combination of natural and manufactured sand. The fill sand shall be relatively clean and be free from deleterious materials such as weeds, sticks, grass, or roots. 2. Gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM C117 and C136:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight ¼ - inch 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 200 0-8
C. Rock Screenings
1. Crushed Rock Screenings will not be allowed.
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE PREPARATION
A. Stripping, Clearing and Conservation of Topsoil
1. Sod, heavy growths of weeds or other vegetation, matted roots, trees and other trash and debris shall be removed from all areas to be excavated to receive embankments; such removal may be accomplished by stripping or other satisfactory measures. Strippings and debris shall be transported to approved waste areas and shall not be incorporated in or covered by fills and embankments. Trees and brush may be burned according to local fire codes and rules. A burning permit shall be obtained prior to any burning. Topsoil shall be removed from areas of excavation and embankments to a minimum depth of 6 inches and stored separately for application on areas to be seeded.
B. Surface Drainage
1. Surface drainage shall be diverted away from site of open excavations and trenches. Surface water which enters or accumulates in open excavations or trenches shall be removed and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and condition at no additional expense to the Owner.
C. Barricades and Warning Signs
1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in place all barricades, warning signs, lights and other safety devices required to protect the work, divert traffic and warn the general public of open excavations, unfilled trenches and other areas or conditions which might be hazardous or dangerous during the daylight or dark.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
A. Shoring and Bracing
1. All shoring, bracing and blocking shall be furnished and installed as required to preserve and maintain exposed excavation faces, to protect existing facilities and to provide for the safety of workmen and the general public. All items of shoring and bracing shall be progressively removed as backfilling proceeds.
B. Obstructions
1. Care shall be used while excavating, trenching or performing other work adjacent to any facilities intended to remain in place; except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to publicly owned items, and any repairs required shall be promptly made at his expense. All work in connection with removal and relocation shall be carefully done in accordance with accepted practices so as to result in the maximum salvage of materials suitable for reuse; salvaged materials not utilized in relocation or reconstruction shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be transported and stored in warehouses or yards as directed. Waste materials shall be disposed of in a satisfactory manner at approved locations. No separate or additional payment will be made for any work in connection with removal, relocation or restoration of obstructions and existing facilities. 2. Trenches may intersect other pipelines. The Contractor shall make a reasonable effort to ascertain the existence of obstructions by inquiry and examination of public and private utility maps, and shall locate obstructions by digging in advance of machine excavation where definite information is not available as to their exact location. Where such facilities are
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
unexpectedly encountered and damaged, responsible officials and other affected parties shall be notified and proper arrangements made for the prompt repair and restoration of service. 3. Sidewalks, curb and gutter, drainage structures and similar obstructions may be tunneled under if length of tunnel section at pipe grade is not more than 8 feet; otherwise the obstruction shall be cut in straight lines parallel to the pipeline, or removed to the nearest construction joint if located within five feet of the centerline of the trench, provided that in no case shall the joint or line of cut be less than one foot outside the edge of the trench. Surface obstructions removed to permit construction shall be reconstructed as specified for new construction, if not specified, in accordance with accepted standard practice and to the dimensions, lines and grades of original construction; except concrete slab to be removed, as indicated on the drawings, shall not be reconstructed. 4. Shall be carefully preserved insofar as possible without resorting to hand methods of excavation and due care shall be taken to prevent unnecessary damage to such vegetation or landscaping improvements. 5. Public utility pipelines, poles, cables, conduits and wires which interfere with construction shall be bypassed or worked around by hand excavating, tunneling, or other approved methods at the Contractor's expense. 6. When on public property, such as fences, small buildings or similar obstructions, will be removed by their respective owners upon notification from the City. Should progress of the work be unduly delayed through such procedure, the Contractor may remove, relocate or reconstruct portion of fences at his own responsibility and expense, or by separate negotiation with the respective owner.
C. Utilization of Excavated Materials
1. Excavated materials shall be used for backfilling and general grading. Excess materials shall be wasted at site provided by the Contractor. Approval of waste sites by the Engineer must be obtained. Approval by the Division of Water Resources may be required. All backfill and embankment shall be compacted as specified herein; other grading and stockpiling require no special degree of compaction, except that the material shall be placed in uniform lifts not more than 1 foot in depth and each lift shall be compacted uniformly by planned routing of construction equipment. Stored topsoil shall be spread over all embankments and other areas to be seeded to a minimum depth of 6 inches. No special compaction of topsoil will be required other than that obtained by operation of spreading and finishing equipment. 2. All materials, including rock excavated from the work or structures removed from the site, not belonging to other parties and not required for the new construction shall be and remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered and neatly piled by the Contractor at a point designated by the Owner or Engineer. Such material shall be considered in the custody of the Contractor until delivered at the place designated and the Contractor shall be held responsible for its care and protection and must make good any losses occasioned by damage, theft or misappropriation while it is on the work site or enroute to the place of storage. The Contractor shall deliver such material without additional cost to the Owner at any designated point within City limits.
D. Trenching
1. Trenching shall be open cut, with banks kept as nearly vertical as practicable and safe. Width of trenching below top of pipe shall be not less than 12 and no more than 16 inches wider than outside diameter of pipe to be installed. Whenever rock is encountered, the trench shall be over excavated 12" and backfilled with sand or selected soil.
E. Overdepth Excavation
1. Except for the usual variations normally occurring in trenching and structure excavation, and within the tolerance specified or customarily permitted in work of this type, trenches and
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
excavation shall not be carried below the depths required to permit construction to the elevations, grades and dimensions shown on the drawings. Overdepth trenching shall be corrected by backfilling with gravel or crushed rock; inundated sand; or suitable select material placed and compacted in light lifts to a uniform density equal to that of adjacent and undisturbed materials. Over depth excavation under structures shall be filled with concrete, or as specified for backfilling. Foundations or footings will be redesigned or the heights of walls increased, where such action is required for stability.
3.3 BACKFILLING
A. Pipeline Bedding
1. Bottom of trenches shall be prepared by method hereinafter specified prior to installation of the pipeline. No separate payment will be made for pipeline bedding, such work being incidental to the work of furnishing and installing pipeline. 2. Bottom of trench shall be overexcavated and the pipe shall be bedded with compacted granular material placed on a flat trench bottom for a minimum thickness of 4 inches under the barrel and extending to an elevation 6 inches above the top of the pipe. Granular bedding shall be placed and compacted simultaneously on each side of pipe, using particular care to obtain satisfactory bedding throughout the length of pipe without causing displacement of or damage to joints.
B. Trench Backfill
1. Upper portion of trenches shall be filled in accordance with the following applicable procedure as determined for the particular location or purpose. The Contractor shall make any necessary excavation to allow the Owner’s Project Representative to take compaction tests at sites selected by the Project Representative or Engineer. The compaction test shall dictate the quality of the compaction and the Contractor shall remove and recompact any areas that do not pass the compaction test, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining proctors and optimum moisture for the soil encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Compacted Backfill: All embankment required to fill sections of roadbeds and fill required under structures shall be compacted by rolling with a sheepsfoot roller or by mechanical tamping. The sheepsfoot roller, when fully loaded, shall have a load on each tamper foot not less than 200 pounds per square inch of cross-sectional area. Optimum moisture shall be present in the soil to obtain a density equal to or greater than 95% of maximum density as determined by the Standard Proctor Density Test before placing the next lift. Each lift shall consist of level 8 inch loose lifts or less prior to compaction. b. Standard Backfill: Entire upper portion of trenches and manhole replacement at all other locations, where compacted backfill is not required, shall be backfilled with an approved sheepsfoot as specified above. A density equal to or greater than 90% of maximum density, as determined by the Standard Proctor Density Test, shall be achieved before placing the next lift. Each lift shall consist of level 8 inch loose lifts or less prior to compaction. c. Mechanical Tamping: Backfill by mechanical tamping of the trench and manhole replacement shall consist of select earth containing optimum moisture for maximum compaction placed in 6 inch layers, to be tamped with air hammers until the backfill material is uniformly compacted to a density equal to or greater than 95% of maximum density, as determined by the Standard Proctor Density Test before placing the next lift.
C. Embankment
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Embankment shall consist of approved material, free from objectionable matter, and shall be brought to approximate optimum moisture content, then manipulated and compacted to uniform density equal to or greater than 95 percent of maximum, as determined by Standard Proctor Density Test. Moisture requirements of the soil shall be no less than 3 points below and 2 points above optimum moisture requirements of the soil being compacted. Depth of lifts or layers shall be controlled by methods of compaction and shall be such as to obtain a uniform density throughout the entire embankment or fill not to exceed 8 inches of loose soil. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining proctors and optimum moisture for the soil encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Structure Excavation and Backfill
1. Where concrete is to be placed directly against excavating faces, excavation shall be carried sufficiently outside the neat lines of the structure to provide not less than 3 inches of concrete cover over the reinforcement. Excavation shall be carried to depths or elevations shown. Care shall be taken to avoid overdepth excavation except where unsuitable subgrade materials be ordered removed; over excavated volumes shall be filled with concrete or selected excavated materials placed and compacted as specified for backfills. All trash and debris shall be removed from the excavation prior to backfilling. Backfill material, free from large clods, trash or other objectionable materials shall be placed around the structure in light lifts and compacted to a density equal to that of adjacent undisturbed material.
3.4 FINISH GRADING
A. Upon completion of other work at each location, the entire site of construction shall be graded to uniform slopes, properly shaped and conforming to adjacent contours, providing free drainage without ponding, and presenting a neat and finished appearance.
END OF SECTION 31 20 00
EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil treatment. 2. Bait-station system.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:
1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.
C. Bait-Station System Installation Report: Include the following:
1. Location of areas and sites conducive to termite feeding and activity. 2. Plan drawing showing number and locations of bait stations. 3. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence, indicating level of termite activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial Completion. 4. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 5. Quantities of termiticide and nontoxic termite bait used. 6. Schedule of inspections for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION
A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. BASF Corporation. b. Bayer Environmental Science. c. Ensystex, Inc.
2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.
2.2 BAIT-STATION SYSTEM FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
A. Description: EPA-Registered system acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide bait stations based on the dimensions of building perimeter indicated on Drawings, according to product's EPA-Registered Label and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. BASF Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.
TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas, including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below-grade walls will be penetrated.
B. Post warning signs in areas of application.
C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
3.3 INSTALLING BAIT-STATION SYSTEM
A. Bait-Station System: Install during construction to determine areas of termite activity and after construction, including landscaping, is completed.
B. Place bait stations according to product's EPA-Registered Label and manufacturer's written instructions, in the following locations: 1. In and around infested trees and stumps. 2. In mulch beds. 3. Where wood directly contacts soil. 4. Areas of high soil moisture. 5. Each area where roof drainage system, including downspouts and scuppers, drains to soil. 6. Along driplines of roof overhangs without gutters. 7. Where condensate lines from mechanical equipment drip or drain to soil. 8. At plumbing penetrations through ground-supported slabs. 9. Other sites and locations as determined by licensed Installer.
END OF SECTION 31 31 16
TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16 - 3 . BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 32 13 13 – CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roadways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walks.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
B. Special Inspector: Architect, Engineer, or their technical representative qualified to review the work.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments
C. Shop Drawings: Plans denoting locations of control joints and expansion joints.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:
1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.
B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:
1. Aggregates. Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
C. Field quality-control reports.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 1
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems.
B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate typical joints; surface finish, texture, and color; curing; and standard of workmanship. 2. Build mockups of concrete paving in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, build mockups where directed by Special inspector and not less than 96 inches (2400 mm) by 96 inches (2400 mm). Include full-size detectable warning. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Special inspector specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m) or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 2
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.
B. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain.
C. Epoxy-Coated, Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars.
D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire or plastic, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. Use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.
E. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.
F. Welded Wire Fabric: All welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 3
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.
B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:
2.7 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS
A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. 2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 3" maximum.
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: 7 percent plus or minus 1 percent.
D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 4
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when approved by the engineer and required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
F. Cementitious Materials: Limit, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash may be substituted for cement up to a maximum of 100 lbs per cubic yard of concrete.
G. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m).
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M . Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Provide a job site mock-up to be approved by the Architect, Engineer, or Special Inspector prior to start of construction. The accepted mock-up shall be standard for remainder of installed work. Mock-up shall be protected from damage until final approval of the project.
C. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) according to requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 5
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints as indicated on the plans. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint- filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 6
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches (75 mm) either way from centers of dowels.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.
a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches (75 mm) either way from centers of dowels.
3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.
K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 7
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
L. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
M. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES
A. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish At Stair Treads: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread dampened, slip-resistive aggregate over paving surface in three applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. 2. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate.
3.9 DETECTABLE WARNINGS
A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving.
1. Tolerance for Opening Size: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 8
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.
3.11 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm). 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches (13 mm per 300 mm) of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Testing Services of aggregate for concrete shall be in accordance with the following.
1. Sieve Analysis of Aggregate – ASTM C136
a. The Contractor shall conduct ASTM C136 for every 250 tons of aggregate used in order to control product quality.
2. Material Passing No. 200 Sieve by the Wash Method – ASTM C117
a. The Contractor shall conduct ASTM C117 for every 250 tons of aggregate used in order to control product quality.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 9
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Testing Services of fresh concrete: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when it is 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
D. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Special inspector.
G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
I. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Special inspector.
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Special inspector, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 10
BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 32 13 13
CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13 - 11
. BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 33 92 00 – TURFS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Seeding. a. Soil preparation.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. United States Department of Agriculture, (USDA): a. Federal Seed Act.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product technical submittal:
1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Signed copies of vendor's statement for seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, place of origin, strain, percentage of purity, percentage of germination, and amount of Pure Live Seed (PLS) per bag. 4. Type of herbicide to be used during first growing season to contain annual weeds and application rate.
B. Certification:
1. Certify each container of seed delivered will be labeled in accordance with Federal and State Seed Laws and equals or exceeds Specification requirements.
C. Other Documents:
1. Copies of invoices for fertilizer used on Project showing grade furnished, along with certification of quality and warranty. If Engineer determines fertilizer requires sampling and testing to verify quality, testing will be done at Contractor's expense, in accordance with current methods of Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Upon completion of Project, a final check of total quantities of fertilizer used will be made against total area seeded. If minimum rates of application have not been met, Contractor will be required to distribute additional quantities to make up minimum application specified. 2. DR Form 125, “Fertilizer Certification” for bulk fertilizer. 3. Mulch “Noxious Weed Free” certification.
TURFS AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Installation Schedule:
1. Show schedule of when disturbed areas are anticipated to be planted. 2. Indicate anticipated dates Engineer will be required to review installation for initial acceptance and final acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Seed Quality: Fresh, clean, new-crop seed labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in effect on date of bidding. Provide certified seed of species and proportions. Weed seed shall not exceed 0.5% of the total weight of pure live seed within any mixture. Approval of all seed for use shall be based on the accumulative total of PLS specified for each phase of work.
B. Seeding - Turf:
1. Ground areas shall be seeded or sodded with Kansas Premium Fescue Blend at a rate of 8 lbs/1,000sf. Initial watering of seed, plugs or sprigs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure re-establishment. Further watering shall be the responsibility of the individual property owner. a. Seeding – All grasses shall be re-established by appropriate seeding methods. All areas to be seeded shall be free of three-quarter ( ¾ ) inch or larger rocks and other debris. Topsoil shall be provided where necessary to assure a stand of grass and all areas deemed completed shall be seed during the earliest appropriate season. Appropriate mulch shall be provided in areas where steep slopes may promote erosion. b. Sodding. All sod shall be of good quality. Sod shall be placed so that the top of the soil incorporated in the strip of sod matches the desired finished grade. 2. Typical residential seed application rates:
Species PLS – lbs. per 1,000 sf Bluegrass 3.0 Buffalograss Seed (Treated) 2.0 Brome 0.5 Kansas Premium Fescue Blend 8.0 Perennial Ryegrass 8.0 Bermuda 3.0
C. Mulch:
1. For seeded areas: Clean, seed-free, threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, rye, native prairie hay, native grass hay from planted warm season grass stands, or other locally available mulch material. Straw or other mulch material, which is fresh or excessively brittle, or in such an advanced stage of decomposition as to smother or retard the growth of grass or the seeded cover crop, will not be acceptable. 2. Mulch shall be certified as “Noxious Weed Free” by the “County Weed Control Authority” or other authorized agents.
D. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer meeting applicable requirements of State and Federal law. Cyanic compound or hydrated lime not permitted in mixed fertilizers.
TURFS AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. 13–13–13 analysis, with less than 50 percent nitrogen listed as water insoluble. 2. It shall be of uniform composition, dry and free flowing material in condition for application by suitable equipment, and delivered in containers fully labeled with manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. 3. Any fertilizer, which becomes caked or otherwise damaged, will not be acceptable. 4. Contractor shall apply required fertilizer to provide one (1) pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet.
E. Water shall be free from substances harmful to grass. Provide water from source approved prior to use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SOIL PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Limit preparation to areas, which will be planted soon after. 2. Provide facilities to protect and safeguard all persons on or about premises. 3. Protect existing trees designated to remain. 4. Verify location and existence of all underground utilities. Take necessary precaution to protect existing utilities from damage due to construction activity. Repair all damages to utility items at sole expense.
B. Soil Preparation for Seeding.
1. Loosen surface to minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones over 3/4 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. 2. Prior to applying fertilizer, loosen areas to be seeded with a double disc or other suitable device if the soil has become hard or compacted. Correct any surface irregularities in order to prevent pocket or low areas, which will allow water to stand. 3. Distribute fertilizer uniformly over areas to be seeded: 4. Incorporate fertilizer into soil to a depth of at least 2 inches by disking, harrowing, or other approved methods. Remove stones or other substances from surface, which will interfere with turf development or subsequent mowing operations. 5. Grade disturbed areas to a smooth, even surface with a loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas, which can be planted soon after preparation. 6. Restore disturbed areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Seeding
1. Do not use seed which is wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged. 2. Perform seeding at any time during the year except between May 1st and September 16th, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 3. Employ satisfactory methods of sowing using mechanical power-driven drills or seeders, or mechanical hand seeders, or other approved equipment. 4. Distribute seed evenly over entire area, 50 percent sown in one direction, remainder at right angles to first sowing.
TURFS AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
5. Stop work when work extends beyond most favorable planting season for species designated, or when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of drought, high winds, excessive moisture, or other factors. Resume work only when favorable conditions develop. 6. Lightly rake seed into soil followed by light rolling or cultipacking, if required. 7. Immediately protect seeded areas against erosion by mulching. Spread mulch uniformly in a continuous blanket, using 3 tons per acre to a depth of 4 or 5 straws. 8. If the mulching material is too long and brittle for proper securing in the surface soil, it shall be cut by an ensilage cutter or other equipment to lengths of not more than 8 inches and watered as needed before spreading to assure proper securing of mulch into the soil. 9. Mulching shall be started at the windward side of relatively flat areas, or at the upper part of a steep slope, and shall continue uniformly until the area is completely covered. 10. Immediately following spreading mulch, anchor mulch using a rolling coulter or a wheat land packer having wheels with V-shaped edges to force mulch into soil surface. 11. On slopes where machinery cannot be used, mulch shall be retained in place by a shallow covering of earth, by pressing into the soil at 12 inch intervals with a spade or other approved tool, by twine, stakes, or brush, or by other suitable means, which will not be detrimental to subsequent maintenance. 12. Protect seeded slopes against erosion with erosion netting or other methods approved by Engineer or as shown on the Drawings. Protect seeded areas against traffic or other use by erecting barricades and placing warning signs. 13. If hydroseeding is used, the machinery must be approved, modern, properly equipped and operated by an experienced operator. Seed and fertilize at the rate specified. Use appropriate shields to protect adjacent site improvements.
3.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT
A. General:
1. Begin maintenance period of planted (permanently seeded) areas immediately after each portion is planted and continue until final acceptance of the entire planted area. 2. Replace unacceptable materials with materials and methods identical to the original specifications unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
B. Permanently Seeded Areas:
1. Engineer will review seeded area after installation for initial acceptance. 2. If project area will be seeded over more than one season: a. Engineer must agree to limits of seeded areas per season. b. If Engineer agrees to limits, maintenance period will be applicable to these limits for that planting. 3. Remulch with new mulch in areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations sufficiently to nullify its purpose. Anchor as required to prevent displacement. 4. Unacceptable plantings are those areas that do not meet the quality of the specified material, produce the specified results, or were not installed to the specified methods. 5. Regrade and replant bare or eroded areas using same materials specified. 6. Engineer will review final acceptability of installed areas at end of maintenance period. 7. Maintain repaired areas until remainder of maintenance period.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE
A. If an acceptable stand of grass does not appear within six months after planting, the Contractor shall reseed in the next planting season at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 32 92 00
TURFS AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 33 11 13 – PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This work shall consist of the construction, installation and testing of water distribution and/or transmission piping and all other appurtenances as are necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Drawings and the specifications.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water distribution and transmission piping, fittings and accessories
B. Steel Casing
C. Pipe bedding
D. Acceptance Testing
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving
B. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. Section 33 12 16 Water Utility Distribution Valves
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Review
1. Pipe, pipe accessories, fittings 2. Pressure gauge certification and calibration data
B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install products specified.
C. Certificates of conformance shall be furnished with each lot of pipe supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: All Ductile Iron Pipe for this project shall have the following minimum pressure class ratings: Class 250 for 4”-12”; Class 200 for 24”; and Class 150 for 30”-64” pipe conforming to ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 specifications unless otherwise noted in the Drawings. All Ductile Iron pipe shall be approved by and bear the NSF seal of approval.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. Joints a. All buried pipe shall have standardized mechanical joint or push-on joint ends manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11. b. Gaskets for mechanical or push-on joints shall be neoprene or synthetic rubber. c. Furnish restrained mechanical joints where indicated to offset internal pipeline forces. Restrained mechanical joints shall utilize a follower gland incorporating individually activated wedges, with a rated working pressure of 350 psi. The restraining gland shall be capable of full mechanical joint deflection during assembly, and flexibility shall be maintained after burial. Torque-limited twist-off nuts shall be used to ensure proper actuation of the restraining wedges. Restraining glands shall be EBAA Iron Megalug Series 1100 or Approved Equal. d. All interior and exposed exterior pipe shall be flanged unless otherwise indicated or specified. Pipe flanges shall be ductile iron, conforming to ANSI B16.1 and shall be drilled Class 125. e. Bolts for flanged joints shall be steel in conformance with ASTM A307 Grade B. Nuts shall be ASTM A307 steel with ANSI/ASME B.18.2.2 heavy semifinished pattern. All bolting inside wetwells and vaults shall be stainless steel. f. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be 1/8" thick, full faced synthetic Rubber conforming to Appendix B of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. g. Sleeved or coupled joints shall be provided where indicated. Furnish pipe ends suitable for installing style of sleeve or coupling indicated or specified. Provide anchor couplings where restraint is required to withstand specified operating or hydraulic test pressure and where indicated. 2. Fittings a. Ductile iron fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 and shall be designed for a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Compact fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 shall be used in ductile iron piping only where specifically indicated in the Drawings. b. Fittings for buried gravity pipe shall have standardized mechanical or push-on joints. c. When specified in the Drawings, fittings for buried pressure or flooded pipe shall have restrained joints or be a restrained fitting by One-Bolt, Inc®. d. Flanged fittings shall be provided for flanged pipe. e. Buried ductile iron fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade E-1. 3. Linings and Coatings a. All exposed ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be exterior coated with a durable epoxy- polyamide finish as specified below or with an approved equal. 1) First Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline – Apply at 3.0 to 5.0 mils 2) Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline – Apply at 3.0 to 5.0 mils b. Exterior surfaces of all buried or encased ductile iron pipe and fittings shall receive a shop applied one-mil thick asphaltic coating. Asphaltic coating shall conform to AWWA C115, AWWA C110, and AWWA C153 as applicable. c. Exterior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe and fittings to be located completely or partially inside wetwells, vaults, buildings or in other exposed locations, shall be blast cleaned to near-white metal per SSPC-SP10 and shop coated with a high solids alkyd-phenolic primer to a dry film thickness of 3.0 mils. Shop primer shall be Tnemec Series 37H Chem-Prime H.S. or Approved Equal. d. Flange faces shall be coated with a rust-preventive compound. 4. Polyethylene Encasement: Buried ductile iron piping and fittings shall be encased in polyethylene conforming to ASTM A674.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) C-900 Pressure Pipe and Fittings
1. PVC piping shall have ductile iron pipe (DIP) outside diameter. This pipe is intended for use in pressure-rated potable water delivery systems.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2. The materials of the pipe shall be uniformly blended with unplasticized polyvinyl chloride. Nothing used in its manufacture shall be injurious to humans or animals, nor shall it impart taste or odor to domestic water or in any manner alter the chemical content of waters flowing through the pipe. It shall consist of all new materials, and the manufacturer shall furnish a sworn statement that no reused materials were used in the manufacture of the pipe or fittings. All pipe shall have superior high-tensile strength. Pipe shall conform to all requirements of commercial standards, ANSI, and the following minimum pressure class or as specified in the Drawings: a. AWWA C-900, Class 235, DR 18 b. AWWA C-905, Class 165, DR 25 3. All plastic pipe shall be approved by and bear the NSF seal of approval and will comply with the requirements for Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin components as defined in ASTM D1784 with an estimated hydrostatic design basis (HDB) rating of 4000 psi (27.58 Mpa) for liquid at 73.4°F (23°C). Pipe and fittings with elastomeric seal joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3139. 4. Joints a. Shall be push-on type with integral bell and spigot and elastomeric gaskets meeting the requirements of ASTM D-2122. Rubber gasket rings shall be neoprene or other synthetic material and conform to ASTM F-477. Natural rubber gaskets will not be acceptable. b. The gasketed joint shall meet the laboratory performance requirements specified in ASTM D3139 to verify a leak-free design of the joint. c. Restraint: Clamps for restraining bell and spigot joints shall consist of clamping rings and rods, and shall meet the requirement of ASTM Standard F1674, Standard Test Method for Joint restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe. Restraint devices shall be of ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with connecting bolts of high strength, low alloy metal in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111-A21.11. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be shop coated with an epoxy coating for corrosion resistance. Bell restraint clamps shall be: 1) Ford Meter Box Series 1350 Uni-Flange Block Buster 2) EBAA Iron Series 1500 for C-900 3) Approved Equal 5. Fittings a. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. b. Standard joint restraint for fittings shall have thrust blocking as per the standard details provided in the Drawings. c. When specified in the Drawings or Approved by the Engineer, joint restraint shall be provided by restrained mechanical joints or be a restrained fitting by One-Bolt, Inc® in lieu of concrete thrust blocks. d. Provide all specials, taps, and plugs as specified or indicated. e. Flanged fittings shall be provided for flanged pipe. f. Flange faces shall be coated with a rust-preventive compound. g. Buried ductile iron fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade E-1. 6. Gaskets and Bolting Material a. Rubber gasket rings shall be neoprene or other synthetic material and conform to ASTM F-477. Natural rubber gaskets will not be acceptable. b. Gaskets shall be part of a complete pipe section and purchased as such. c. Provide all gaskets, bolts, lubricants, and other accessories required to install pipe and fittings complete and ready for service. d. Bolts for flanged joints shall conform to ASTM A307 Grade B.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) IPS Pressure Pipe and Fittings
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
1. PVC piping shall have iron pipe size (IPS) outside diameter. This pipe is intended for use in pressure-rated potable water delivery systems. 2. The materials of the pipe shall be uniformly blended with unplasticized polyvinyl chloride. Nothing used in its manufacture shall be injurious to humans or animals, nor shall it impart taste or odor to domestic water or in any manner alter the chemical content of waters flowing through the pipe. It shall consist of all new materials, and the manufacturer shall furnish a sworn statement that no reused materials were used in the manufacture of the pipe or fittings. All pipe shall have superior high-tensile strength. Pipe shall conform to all requirements of commercial standards, ANSI, and the following minimum pressure class or as specified in the Drawings: a. ASTM D 2241, Class 200, SDR 21 3. All plastic pipe shall be approved by and bear the NSF seal of approval and will comply with the requirements for Class 1245-A or Class 1245-B virgin components as defined in ASTM D1784 with an estimated hydrostatic design basis (HDB) rating of 4000 psi (27.58 Mpa) for liquid at 73.4°F (23°C). Pipe and fittings with elastomeric seal joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3139. 4. Joints a. Shall be push-on type with integral bell and spigot and elastomeric gaskets meeting the requirements of ASTM D-2122. Rubber gasket rings shall be neoprene or other synthetic material and conform to ASTM F-477. Natural rubber gaskets will not be acceptable. b. The gasketed joint shall meet the laboratory performance requirements specified in ASTM D3139 to verify a leak-free design of the joint. c. Restraint: Clamps for restraining bell and spigot joints shall consist of clamping rings and rods, and shall meet the requirement of ASTM Standard F1674, Standard Test Method for Joint restraint Products for Use with PVC Pipe. Restraint devices shall be of ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with connecting bolts of high strength, low alloy metal in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111-A21.11. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be shop coated with an epoxy coating for corrosion resistance. Bell restraint clamps shall be: 1) Ford Meter Box Series 1350 Uni-Flange Block Buster 2) EBAA Iron Series 6500 for IPS O.D. PVC Pipe 3) Approved Equal 5. Fittings a. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. b. Standard joint restraint for fittings shall have thrust blocking as per the standard details provided in the Drawings. c. When specified in the Drawings or Approved by the Engineer, joint restraint shall be provided by restrained mechanical joints or be a restrained fitting by One-Bolt, Inc® in lieu of concrete thrust blocks. d. Provide all specials, taps, and plugs as specified or indicated. e. Flanged fittings shall be provided for flanged pipe. f. Flange faces shall be coated with a rust-preventive compound. g. Buried ductile iron fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade E-1.
2.2 RESTRAINED JOINT PVC
A. When specified in the Drawings restrained joint PVC materials shall be as specified in Section 33 90 05 C900 Restrained-Joint PVC pipe and/or Section 33 90 10 Yelomine Restrained-Joint PVC pipe.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.3 STEEL CASING
A. Steel Casings for protection in open trench construction shall be steel pipe conforming to ASTM A139 with a minimum diameter as shown on the Drawings.
1. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the following table: Diameter of Casing Nominal Wall Thickness (Inches) (Inches) KDOT ROW Under Railroads All Other Uses 16 or less 0.250 0.312 0.188 18 0.250 0.312 0.250 20 0.250 0.375 0.250 2. Steel shall be Grade B under railroads and in KDOT ROW and Grade A on all other uses. 3. Steel pipe shall have welded joints in accordance with AWWA C206.
B. Casing Spacers: Spacers shall be used with all casing. Casing spacers shall have a minimum of four (4) runners or one (1) runner for every diameter inch, whichever is greater and shall hold the carrier pipe in the center of the casing. Casing spacers shall be high-density polyethylene and shall be RACI or Approved Equal.
C. Casing End Seals: Ends shall be sealed with synthetic rubber, wrap-around end seals with stainless steel bands, Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Model CCES or Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Model AW or Approved Equal. Alternative concrete end seal may be used if included in detail drawings.
2.4 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Banded Couplings: Banded couplings shall be provided to transition between different pipe materials and sizes as required. Banded couplings for water distribution piping shall be synthetic rubber repair couplings with stainless steel clamping ring bands, reinforced with a PVC shear guard sleeve. Band coupling by GPK Products, Mission, Fernco coupling or Approved Equal. Coupling shall be certified for potable water use.
B. Main Line Tapping Sleeve: Tapping sleeves for main lines under pressure shall be stainless steel. Therefore, the body, flange, bolts and nuts shall be made of 304 (18-8) stainless steel. The flange shall be recessed for tapping valve per MSS-SP60 and the flange outlet double welded inside and out. The sleeve will have a brass or stainless steel ¾” NPT test plug for pressure testing and a complete full circle rubber gasket to provide 360o pipe coverage permanently attached to the body. The sleeve shall be able to withstand 150 psi working pressure. All stainless steel tapping sleeves shall be Ford style FTSS, Mueller H-304, Romac style SST, Powerseal Model 3490 or approved equal.
C. Flange Adapters: Flange adapters shall be the cast iron slip-on type retained by set screws. Flange body shall be ductile iron, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Set screws shall be manufactured from AISI 4140 steel, heat treated to Rockwell C 42-50 and zinc plated. Set screws shall have break away torque heads. Flange adaptors shall conform to ANSI B16.1 for machining and drilling. Gaskets shall be standard mechanical joint gaskets, EPDM or Buna-N. All non-plated ferrous metal parts shall be shop primed with an epoxy primer, for finish painting in the field. Flange adaptors shall be Ford Meter Box Corporation UNI-Flange Series or Approved Equal.
D. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical Couplings shall be gasketed, sleeve-type, sized to properly fit the pipes to be joined, with steel or ductile iron middle ring, steel or ductile iron follower rings, and synthetic rubber gaskets. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be shop coated with an epoxy coating for corrosion resistance. All hardware shall be 300 series stainless steel. Mechanical couplings shall be Ford Meter Box Style FC3, FC4 or FC23, Dresser Style 38 or 162 or approved equal.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
E. Water Service Saddles: Saddles shall be installed for all services on PVC pipe. Saddle shall be Mueller H-13420, Two-Piece with AWWA taper thread (C.C.), or approved equal. Direct tapping of ductile iron pipe will be allowed for water services.
F. Corporation Stop: Corp Stops shall be installed for all water services and other locations as indicated on the drawings. Corp stop shall be of the ground key design with AWWA taper thread (C.C.) Inlet and Conductive Compressive Connection for C.T.S. OD Tubing. Stop shall be Mueller H-15031, or approved equal.
G. Curb Stop Valve: Curb valve shall be installed for all water services as indicated on the drawings. Curb shall provide a full roundway for straight through flow. Curb valve shall be rated for 300 psi service. End connections shall be of compression type for C.T.S. OD Tubing. Curb shall be Mueller 300 ball curb valve, or approved equal.
H. Water Service Pipe: Water service pipe shall be PE 3608 or PE 3710 (formerly PE 3408) with a pressure rating of 200 psi and conforming to ASTM D2737 and AWWA C901. Pipe material shall meet cell class 345464C per ASTM D3350. For service lines less than 100’ service pipe shall be laid as one continuous line without splicing. For service lines greater than 100’ service line splicing shall be allowed at 100’ intervals.
I. 5.25” Fire Hydrant: Hydrants shall be installed at locations as indicated on the drawings and meeting the following criteria:
1. All hydrants shall have bell ends for connection to six (6) inch standard ductile iron pipe. The fire hydrant shall have a minimum five and one-quarter (5 ¼) inch main valve opening and shall have two (2), two and one-half (2 ½) inch hose nozzles, and one (1), four and one-half (4 ½) inch pumper nozzle. 2. Hydrants shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C502 Standard and UL 246 and FM 1510 specifications and be of the “Dry Barrel” type. 3. Hydrants shall be post style, gate or compression type, suitable for 250 pound working pressure and tested and guaranteed for pressure of 500 pounds per square inch. 4. Hydrants shall open to the left (counter-clockwise). 5. Hydrant size shall be designated as the nominal size of the main valve opening, and the net area of the smallest part shall not be less than 120 percent of the fully opened valve. 6. Hydrants shall be for a minimum four (4) foot depth of bury. 7. Hose caps shall be provided for all outlets and shall be securely chained to the barrel with one-eight (1/8) inch galvanized steel, non-kinking chain. 8. Hydrants shall be Mueller Super Centurion, U.S. Pipe Metropolitan/M94, American-Darling B- 84-B-5 or Clow Medallion.
J. Tracer Wire: Tracer Wire for all underground piping shall be 12 AWG Solid Copper wire with HMW-PE Insulation (0.045” Min Thickness). Wire shall be suitable for Direct Burial. Tracer Wire shall be installed on all bored piping and shall be sized accordingly for stresses incurred during boring activities.
K. Tracer Wire Marker: Markers shall be 72” Trace-O-Flex Markers as manufactured by Carsonite Composites (or approved equal). Markers shall denote with appropriate lettering for the proposed utility.
L. Pipe Insulation: Where indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with Foamglas cellular glass thermal insulation, ASTM C 552, 2” thick, jacketed with Pittwrap-stainless steel jacketing (016 thickness), as manufactured by Pittsburg Corning Corporation or approved equal. Implementation of pipe insulation shall adhere to manufacture’s recommendations.
M. Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape: Warning Tape shall be detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Tape shall be 6” wide and colored per industry standard with warning and identification imprinted in big black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall denote the proposed utility and read “CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW” or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material.
2.5 EMBEDMENT
A. Requirements for embedment material shall be as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.
B. Concrete Encasement: Where indicated on the Drawings, concrete encasement shall be provided instead of the pipe embedment classes specified herein. Requirements for concrete encasement are detailed in the Drawings, Concrete and reinforcement shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00.
2.6 BACKFILL
A. Backfill materials shall be as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.
2.7 VALVES
A. Water main valves shall be as specified in Section 33 12 16 Water Utility Distribution Valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing conditions are as shown on the Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall verify the location and depth of all utilities a minimum of 24 hours prior to construction. The Contractor may utilize the toll free number for the “Kansas One Call System, Inc.” at 1-800-344-7233. This number is applicable anywhere within the state of Kansas. Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall notify all those companies which have facilities in the vicinity of the construction.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that are not to be removed or replaced from damage. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to protect all existing utilities from damage. If any utility is damaged through the carelessness or neglectful actions of the Contractor, the utility shall be repaired by its owner at the Contractor’s expense.
B. Any private facilities damaged or disturbed by the Contractor’s work shall be repaired by the Contractor prior to close of the working day. Repairs shall be made in a manner sufficient to restore utility service to that property.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 7 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping.
D. Protect all property or lot corner pins and stakes from damage or displacement. All property pins removed or damaged are to be reset by a Registered Land Surveyor at the Contractor’s expense.
E. Protect from damage or displacement all project benchmarks and existing structures within or adjacent to the construction limits that are not to be removed or demolished.
3.4 SEPARATION OF WATER AND SEWER UTILITIES
A. Gravity Sewer Lines laid Parallel to Water Lines: When potable water pipes and gravity sewers are laid parallel to each other, the horizontal distance between them shall be not less than 10 feet (3.0 m). The distance shall be measured from edge to edge. The laying of water pipes and sanitary sewers shall be in separate trenches with undisturbed earth between them. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 10 foot (3.0 m) separation, the contractor shall notify the Engineer, and the Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods. Equivalent protection may require the sanitary sewer construction with one of the following additional protective features: concrete encasement, vacuum sewers, or jointless pipe such as fused HDPE or cured-in- place pipe liner.
B. Gravity Sewer Lines Crossing Water Lines: When a water pipe and a sanitary sewer cross and the sewer is 2 feet (0.6 m) or more (clear space) below the water pipe, no special requirements or limitations are provided herein. At all other crossings, the contractor shall notify the Engineer, and Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods. Equivalent protection may require the sanitary sewer to be constructed of one of the following materials (or approved equal) and pressure tested to assure water tightness pursuant to the most recent revision of KDHE’s Minimum Standards of Design of Water Pollution Control Facilities:
1. Ductile iron pipe conforming to ASTM A 536 or ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 with minimum thickness class 50, and gasketed, push on, or mechanical joints in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D3034 with minimum wall thickness of SDR41, ASTM F679, or ASTM F794, with gasketed push-on joints in conformance with ASTM D3212. 3. Reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C76 with gasketed joints in conformance with ASTM C361 or ASTM C443.
Joints in the sewer pipe shall be located as far as practical from the intersected water main. Joints in the Water pipe shall be located as far as practical from the intersected Sewer main.
Where a water main is laid across or through an area where there is an existing sanitary sewer that is not constructed of one of the above specified materials and is 2 ft. (0.6 m) or less below the water pipe, the existing sewer shall be encased in concrete with a minimum thickness of 6 inches (15.2 cm) for a 10 ft. (3.0 m) distance on each side of the crossing or the crossed section of sewer replaced to meet the above specified construction requirements. The above requirements shall also apply where a water main must cross under an existing sanitary sewer. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 2 foot (0.6 m) separation, the contractor shall notify the Engineer, and the Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods.
C. Pressure Sewer Lines: When sewer force mains run parallel to water lines, the separation distance shall be as far as practical, but at least a 10 foot (3.0 m) horizontal separation shall be maintained. There shall be at least a 2 foot (0.6m) vertical separation at crossings with water main crossing above the sewer force main. In cases where it is not practical to maintain the required vertical or horizontal separation distance between a water line and a sanitary sewer force main, the Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 8 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
D. Sewer Connections: There are to be no physical connections between any parts of the potable water system with building sewers, sanitary sewers, or wastewater treatment facilities by means of which it would be possible for sewage, even under exceptional circumstances, to reach the wells, storage reservoirs, or distribution systems.
E. Sewer Manholes: No water pipe shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole. Required horizontal separation distances between water mains and manholes are equivalent to those for water mains and gravity sanitary sewers.
F. Storm Sewers: The separation distance between a storm sewer (which is not a combined storm/sanitary sewer) and a water main should be based on geotechnical considerations. Required separation distances between water mains and combined storm/sanitary sewers are equivalent to those for water mains and gravity sanitary sewers.
G. Drains: Underground drains from fire hydrants or valve pits should not be directly connected to sanitary or storm drains.
H. Other Pollution Sources: It is of the utmost importance that potable water lines be protected from any source of pollution. The following shall pertain to instances where septic tanks, absorption fields, waste stabilization ponds, feedlots, or other sources of pollution are encountered.
1. A minimum distance of 25 feet shall be maintained between all potable water lines and all septic tanks or waste stabilization ponds. 2. Under no circumstances shall a water line extend through a septic tank absorption field or feedlot. All water lines shall be located a minimum of 25 feet from the furthest known extent of any sewage contamination. Under no condition will it be considered that encasement of the water main through an area of real or potential pollution would provided the protection needed to the water supply.
3.5 EMBEDMENT
A. Trenching and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving. Blasting will not be allowed unless approval by the Owner and Engineer is given.
B. Granular Bedding: Bottom of trench shall be overexcavated and the pipe shall be bedded with compacted granular material placed on a flat trench bottom and extending to an elevation 6 inches above the top of the pipe. The granular bedding shall have a minimum thickness of 4 inches under the barrel. Embedment over rock shall include an additional 2 inches below the pipe.
C. Place embedment material at the trench bottom with proper allowance for bell joints. Level materials in continuous layers not exceeding 4 inches in compacted depth. Shovel slicing of embedment shall be performed along the sides of the pipe as embedment is placed to consolidate the bedding and haunching below the pipe.
D. Consolidate granular embedment by rodding, spading and compacting as necessary to provide uniform pipe support.
E. Each lift of granular embedment material shall be compacted to a minimum 90% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D-698.
F. Low permeability Trench Plugs shall be installed at 400’ intervals along the waterline trench to prevent water leak migration. The plugs shall be Select Material compacted to Mechanical Tamping standards according to Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving. The plugs shall be 5’ in length centered on the 400’ intervals.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 9 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
G. Where shown on the Drawings, concrete encasement shall be provided instead of pipe embedment.
3.6 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All pipe shall be protected during transport, storage and installation from shock and free fall. Pipes shall be installed without cracking, chipping, breaking, bending or damaging the materials. Damaged pipe shall be replaced with new materials except when repairs are permitted by the Engineer. Use slings, lifting lugs, hooks and other protection devices during handling. A double sling shall be required when handling plastic pipe 10 feet or longer.
B. Install pipe of the size, material, strength class, and joint type as specified or indicated on the Drawings. Clean the interior of all pipe fittings and joints prior to installation.
C. Install water pipelines with the bell ends facing the direction of laying, except when reverse laying is specifically authorized by the Engineer.
D. Laying of Pipe: All pipe shall be laid true to the alignment and grade indicated on the Drawings as staked by the Contractor. Laser Beam equipment is preferred for construction with checks on grade by survey equipment, when required. Each pipe section shall be carefully inspected before it is laid and any section not conforming in all respects to the specifications shall be rejected. Any defective pipe inadvertently laid, shall on discovery at any time, be immediately removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
E. Pipe installation shall be in accordance with applicable standards, such as ANSI/AWWA C600, ANSI/AWWA C605, and AWWA M55 except where conflicts with this section occur, in which case this section shall govern.
F. Clean the interior of all pipe fittings and joints prior to installation. Protect pipe against the entrance of debris and foreign matter during discontinuance of installation and at the close of the working day by installing a close fitting plug at the open end. Plugs shall be water tight against heads up to 20 feet of water.
G. The Contractor shall take whatever means necessary to keep the trenches free of water and as dry as possible during pipe installation, bedding and jointing operations. No pipe shall be laid in water or under unsuitable trench conditions. Should unsuitable trench conditions be encountered, the Contractor shall halt work until the Engineer approves continuation of the work or alternate methods for continuation of the work.
H. Dewatering of Trench and Other Excavations: The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of all surface and ground water entering excavation, trenches and all other parts of the work. Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure is to be built, or the pipeline to be installed is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation or other causes will result. Water main in place shall not be used as drainage lines.
I. After each pipe has been brought to grade, aligned and placed in final position, place sufficient embedment material under the haunches and on each side of the pipe to hold the pipe in proper position during subsequent pipe jointing, bedding and backfilling operations. Compact embedment material to 90 percent maximum density by rodding, spading, or using suitable compaction equipment. Place embedment material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of the pipe to prevent lateral displacement.
J. The Contractor shall install the proposed waterline without disruption of water service to customers until connections are ready to be made.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 10 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
K. Pipe cutting shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe. Main taps for service saddles shall be made with a tapping tool specifically designed for that purpose. Cut edges shall be smoothed by power grinding to remove burrs and shape edges. The contractor shall field verify existing pipe material prior to field cutting. If existing pipe is determined to contain asbestos material the contractor shall abide by all state and federal regulations regarding friable asbestos material. Written notification of the intent to demolish structures is required under the EPA asbestos NESHAP regulations (40 CFR Part 61.145). The contractor shall complete the KDHE asbestos demolition and notification form (Form ET-ASB10). This completed from shall be postmarked at least 10 working days prior to start of demolition activities. This work shall be subsidiary to the other items of the contract.
3.7 PIPE JOINTING
A. Locate joints to provide for differential movement at changes in type of embedment, concrete collars and encasement and structures. Water main jointing shall be according to the following specifications:
1. Clean and lubricate all joint and gasket surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Examine all materials prior to installation for soundness and compliance with specifications. 3. Check joint position and condition after assembly prior to installing additional pipe sections. 4. Check joint opening and deflection for specification limits.
B. Threaded: Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT, and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed, after threading and before assembly, to remove all burrs.
1. Threaded joints, in plastic piping, shall be made up with Teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. At the option of the Contractor, threaded joints in other piping may be made up with Teflon thread tape, thread sealer or a suitable joint compound.
C. Flanged: Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but not so tight as to fracture to distort the flanges. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all bolts during assembly. Connecting flanges shall have similar facings, i.e., flat or raised face.
D. Push-on: Gasket installation and other jointing operations shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Each spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with a material that meets manufacturer requirements and conforms to NSF 61 immediately before the joint is completed. The interior surface of the bell and the exterior surface of the spigot shall be free of dust, dirt, gravel and other foreign material, both before and after the application of the lubricant sealer. The joint shall be connected by first brushing upon the matting surface the proper lubricant sealer as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, the spigot end shall then be centered on grade into the bell end of the last downstream pipe length and shoved home and properly seated.
3.8 DUCTILE IRON PIPING
A. Handling: Pipe and fittings shall be handled and installed carefully to prevent damage to pipe material, lining and coatings. Hooks placed in ends of pipe or fittings shall have well-padded surfaces. All coatings which are damaged shall be repaired by the Contractor prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Cutting: Pipe shall be shop fabricated to the approximate lengths required. Pipe shall not be cut in the field, except where flange adapters or mechanical couplings are indicated o the Drawings or
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 11 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
where allowed by the Engineer. Pipe may be cut with a portable saw, abrasive wheel or oxyacetylene torch. The use of hydraulic squeeze type cutters will not be permitted. Cuts shall be smooth, straight and at right angles to the pipe axis. Cut edges shall be dressed with a file or power grinder to remove all roughness and sharp edges.
C. Flanged Joints: Flange faces shall be machine faced with pipe end, flat and perpendicular to the pipe axis. When bolting flanged joints, care shall be taken to avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and uniformly, to ensure uniform compression of the gasket.
D. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints shall be assembled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. If the joint does not form an effective seal, the joint shall be completely disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to the torque values listed in Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.
E. Buried ductile iron pipe shall be provided with polyethylene tube protection installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.
3.9 JOINT RESTRAINT FOR WATER MAIN
A. Joint restraint shall be provided for pressure piping. Joint restraint may be provided by concrete thrust blocking as detailed in the Drawings or by mechanically restrained joints as provided in Section 2.01.B.4.c and Section 2.01.C.4.c of this Specification.
3.10 ASSOCIATED WATER MAIN WORK
A. Sheeting and Bracing or Trench Boxes shall be provided in all trenches where required to insure maximum safety of workman. Sheeting may be wood or metal. Sheeting shall be driven to a depth of at least two feet below the pipe. Following installation of the pipe and backfill to at least two feet over the pipe, shoring shall be removed as backfilling procedures progress, but only when banks are stable and safe from caving or collapse. With Engineers approval, wooden sheeting shall be cut off at least two feet below ground level and the remainder left in place.
B. Standard Street Crossing: Whenever an improved driveway or street is crossed the surface shall be replaced after the trench has been backfilled and compacted. In lieu of backfill and compaction, flowable fill may be used as specified in the Drawings. A minimum of eight (8) inches of pavement shall be removed on either side of the trench. The outside pavement cut shall be a true line completed with a power saw. See Drawings for specific instructions at each standard street crossing. If the street or driveway crossing is existing gravel, a minimum thickness of 4” of gravel surfacing as specified shall be placed.
C. Tracer Wire
1. All underground pipes shall be marked by the use of a continuous trench indicator wire. The wire shall run in all locations and be secured at terminating locations with properly sized wire nuts secured with electrical tape suitable for direct bury. 2. The tracer wire shall be installed directly above and attached to the pipe at a minimum of 3 times per 20’ length with 1½” polyethylene tape wrapped twice around the pipe.
D. Tracer Wire Markers: Tracer Wire Markers shall be installed at locations indicated in the drawings. Markers shall be installed to a depth of 24”. Markers shall be connected with properly sized wire nuts secured with electrical tape suitable for direct bury.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 12 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.11 PRESSURE PIPING ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All new water transmission, distribution or service piping will be subject to hydrostatic pressure testing under this subpart. All portions of the new installation shall be included in the hydrostatic testing including, valves, fire hydrants, corporation stops, curb stops, meter valves, etc. New segments of pipelines, which will be connected to existing lines, shall be pressure tested prior to connection.
B. Notification: Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the scheduled time for testing. Resident Project Representative and/or Engineer shall be present for acceptance testing and approval.
C. Test Conditions:
1. Test procedure shall be according to AWWA C600 or AWWA C605, as required. 2. Unless otherwise specified, a test pressure of not less than 1.5 times the normal operating pressure (for the lowest point on the pipe line) but not less than 150 pounds per square inch (psi) or not more than the rated working pressure for the pipe shall be used for testing. 3. The hydrostatic test shall be conducted for a minimum 2-hour duration. Test pressure shall not vary by more than ±5 psi for the duration of the test.
D. Test Materials: The Contractor shall furnish all pumps, piping, labor, plugs, hose, riser pipe, gauges and other materials and services necessary to bring the piping up to the specified test pressure. The contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner for use of City water supply from an existing fire hydrant.
E. Pressurization: Buried pipe in the section to be tested shall be backfilled or center loaded with thrust blocks installed. Interior pipe supports and restraint systems shall be completely installed prior to testing. The section of pipe shall be isolated and slowly filled with water. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the section of piping to be tested. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, corporation cocks shall be installed at such points so that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged or left in place as directed by the Engineer. The specified test pressure (based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge) shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. Valves shall not be operated in either the opening or closing direction at differential pressures above the rate pressure. The system will be allowed to stabilize at the test pressure before the leakage test is conducted.
F. Examination: All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints shall be inspected for moisture during the test. All evidence of moisture appearing on the surface of the ground during the test shall be investigated by the Contractor by excavation where the pipe has been covered with backfill. Evidence of moisture indicates defective materials or installation and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
G. Allowable Leakage: The leakage test shall be completed simultaneously with the pressure test and shall be in accordance with the Kansas Department of Health and Environment “Policies, General Considerations, and Design Requirements for Public Water Supply Systems in Kansas – Appendix C: Procedures for Pressure and Leakage Testing of Water Mains.” Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air has been expelled. Allowable leakage shall be according to the following equation for DIP or PVC Piping.
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 13 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
L=SD(P)2 /148000,
Where L - Total allowable leakage in one hour, gallons. S - Length of section tested, feet. D - Nominal pipe diameter, inches. P - Test pressure, psi
H. Acceptance of Installation: Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of allowable leakage. If any test of pipe section discloses leakage greater than that specified above, repairs or replacements shall be accomplished in accordance with the specifications. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage. The pressure test shall be repeated after repairing leaks and other defective work until the pipeline installation conforms to specified requirements and is accepted by the Engineer.
3.12 DISINFECTION
A. Before being placed in service, all new potable water mains, including fittings, valves and service lines, shall be chlorinated using a method specified in AWWA C651 or as specified in Appendix D of KDHE’s Policies, General Considerations and Design Requirements for Public Water Supply systems in Kansas. The Owner or Engineer shall approve the procedure in advance.
B. Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at the extremities and replaced with potable water. All treated water flushed from the lines shall be disposed of by discharging to the nearest sanitary sewer or by other approved means. No discharge to any storm sewer or natural watercourse will be allowed. Discharge of chlorinated water shall comply with all Federal, State and local standards.
C. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the replacement water may then be made by the Contractor for two (2) separate samples taken at the end of the main being tested. The samples shall be taken approximately 24 hours apart. Sampling procedure and laboratory proposed for bacteriological testing shall be approved by Owner and/or Engineer prior to initiating disinfection procedures.
D. If either bacteriological testing result indicates the presence of coliform bacteria, Contractor shall re- flush the entire line and proceed with additional bacteriological testing as required. These procedures shall be performed until the two samples show no presence of coliform bacteria.
E. The Contractor is responsible for all sampling and testing costs associated with disinfection requirements. Contractor shall also be charged for all water required for flushing activities after a failing initial bacteriological test.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction and soil testing will be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.
END OF SECTION 33 11 13
PUBLIC WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 11 13 - 14 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
SECTION 33 31 13 – PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This work shall consist of the construction, installation and testing of gravity and pressure sanitary sewer lines all other appurtenances as are necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Drawings and the specifications.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sanitary Sewer gravity and pressure piping, fittings and accessories.
B. Steel Casing.
C. Pipe embedment.
D. Acceptance Testing.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving
B. Section 33 05 16.13 Precast Concrete Utility Structures
C. Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for Review
1. Pipe, pipe accessories, fittings 2. Manholes, castings, manhole appurtenances 3. Pressure gauge certification and calibration data
B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install products specified.
C. Certificates of conformance shall be furnished with each lot of pipe supplied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: All Ductile Iron Pipe for this project shall have the following minimum pressure class ratings: Class 250 for 4”-12”; Class 200 for 24”; and Class 150 for 30”-64” pipe conforming to
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 1 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 specifications unless otherwise noted in the Drawings.
1. Joints a. All buried pipe, gravity or pressure-rated, shall have standardized mechanical joint or push-on joint ends manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11. b. Gaskets for mechanical or push-on joints shall be neoprene or synthetic rubber. c. Furnish restrained mechanical joints where indicated to offset internal pipeline forces. Restrained mechanical joints shall utilize a follower gland incorporating individually activated wedges, with a rated working pressure of 350 psi. The restraining gland shall be capable of full mechanical joint deflection during assembly, and flexibility shall be maintained after burial. Torque-limited twist-off nuts shall be used to ensure proper actuation of the restraining wedges. Restraining glands shall be EBAA Iron Megalug Series 1100 or Approved Equal. d. All interior and exposed exterior pipe shall be flanged unless otherwise indicated or specified. Pipe flanges shall be ductile iron, conforming to ANSI B16.1 and shall be drilled Class 125. e. Bolts for flanged joints shall be steel in conformance with ASTM A307 Grade B. Nuts shall be ASTM A307 steel with ANSI/ASME B.18.2.2 heavy semifinished pattern. All bolting inside wetwells and vaults shall be stainless steel. f. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be 1/8" thick, full faced synthetic Rubber conforming to Appendix B of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. g. Sleeved or coupled joints shall be provided where indicated. Furnish pipe ends suitable for installing style of sleeve or coupling indicated or specified. Provide anchor couplings where restraint is required to withstand specified operating or hydraulic test pressure and where indicated. 2. Fittings a. Ductile iron fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-88 and shall be designed for a minimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Compact fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 shall be used in ductile iron piping only where specifically indicated in the Drawings. b. Fittings for buried gravity pipe shall have standardized mechanical or push-on joints. c. When specified in the Drawings, fittings for buried pressure or flooded pipe shall have restrained joints or be a restrained fitting by One-Bolt, Inc®. d. Flanged fittings shall be provided for flanged pipe. e. Buried ductile iron fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade E-1 3. Linings and Coatings a. All pipe and fittings for wastewater applications shall be lined with an amine-cured novalac epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment by Protecto 401 or Approved Equal. b. Lining shall extend from edge of plain end to the gasket seat in the bell socket. c. Exterior surfaces of all buried or encased ductile iron pipe and fittings shall receive a shop applied one-mil thick asphaltic coating. Asphaltic coating shall conform to AWWA C115, AWWA C110, and AWWA C153 as applicable. d. Exterior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe and fittings to be located completely or partially inside wetwells, vaults, buildings or in other exposed locations, shall be blast cleaned to near-white metal per SSPC-SP10 and shop coated with a high solids alkyd-phenolic primer to a dry film thickness of 3.0 mils. Shop primer shall be Tnemec Series 37H Chem-Prime H.S. or Approved Equal. e. Flange faces shall be coated with a rust-preventive compound. 4. Polyethylene Encasement: Buried ductile iron piping shall be encased in polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade E-1.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 2 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Pipe and Fittings: All PVC sewer pipe and fittings, sizes 4-inch through 15-inch, shall conform to ASTM D-3034, SDR 26. All PVC sewer pipe and fittings, sizes 18- inch through 27-inch, shall conform to ASTM F-679, T-1 (SDR 26).
1. Joints: All joints shall be of the bell and spigot type. The bell shall contain a factory installed elastomeric gasket which is positively retained. Joint shall be in conformance with ASTM D3212. 2. Fittings a. All PVC sewer pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of 12454-B or 12454-C, as defined by ASTM D1784. b. Molded fittings shall be supplied with factory-installed gaskets and shall be suitable for use with SDR-26 gravity sewer pipe. Fittings shall not deflect more than the pipe with loaded and bedded in the same manner. c. All 90° Bends shall be accomplished by using two 45° Bends, unless specifically indicated in the Drawings. 3. Gaskets: All gaskets shall be molded or extruded and spliced from a high-grade, properly vulcanized elastomeric compound, consisting of a synthetic rubber and shall meet the low head requirements of ASTM F-477.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings
The materials of the pipe shall be uniformly blended with unplasticized polyvinyl chloride. Nothing used in its manufacture shall be injurious to humans or animals, nor shall it impart taste or odor to domestic water or in any manner alter the chemical content of waters flowing through the pipe. It shall consist of all new materials, and the manufacturer shall furnish a sworn statement that no re- used materials were used in the manufacture of the pipe or fittings. All pipe shall have superior high- tensile strength. Pipe shall conform to all requirements of commercial standards, ANSI, and the fol- lowing minimum pressure class or as specified in the Drawings:
AWWA C-900, Class 235, DR 18
AWWA C-905, Class 165, DR 25
ASTM 2241, Class 160, SDR 26
All plastic pipe shall be approved by and bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal of approval and will comply with the requirements for Class 1245-A or Class 1245-B virgin components as defined in ASTM D1784 with an estimated hydrostatic design basis (HDB) rating of 4000 psi (27.58 Mpa) for liquid at 73.4°F (23°C). Pipe and fittings with elastomeric seal joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3139.
1. Joints a. Shall be push-on type with integral bell and spigot and elastomeric gaskets meeting the requirements of ASTM D-2122. Rubber gasket rings shall be neoprene or other synthetic material and conform to ASTM F-477. Natural rubber gaskets will not be acceptable. b. Restraint: Clamps for restraining bell and spigot joints shall consist of clamping rings and rods, and shall meet the requirement of Uni-B-13-92. Restraint devices shall be of ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with connecting bolts of high strength, low alloy metal in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111-A21.11. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be shop coated with an epoxy coating for corrosion resistance. Bell restraint clamps shall be: 1) Ford Meter Box Series 1350 Uni-Flange Block Buster 2) EBAA Iron Series 6500 for IPS 3) EBAA Iron Series 1500 for C-900
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 3 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
4) Approved Equal 2. Fittings a. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-88. b. Fittings requiring joint restraint shall have restrained mechanical joints or be a restrained fitting by One-Bolt, Inc®. c. Buried ductile iron fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Grade E-1. 3. Gaskets a. All gaskets shall be molded or extruded and spliced from a high-grade, properly vulcanized elastomeric compound, consisting of a synthetic rubber and shall meet the low head requirements of ASTM F477.
D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe SCH 40: Piping shall meet the requirements of ASTM D-1784 cell classification 12454-B for PVC compounds, and ASTM D-1785 for Schedule 40 PVC pipe.
1. Fittings: Shall be solvent welded socket-type, in accordance with ASTM D-2467. Threaded fittings, in accordance with ASTM D-2464, shall be used only were indicated in the Drawings. 2. Joints: Primer and solvent cement shall conform to ASTM F656 and ASTM D2564, respectively. 3. Flange adapters shall be socket-type solvent welded, with diameter and drilling conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.5, Class 150. Flange gaskets shall be full face, chemical resistant elastomeric material. Flange bolts shall be ASTM Grade B, galvanized to stainless steel.
E. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene Pipe shall be as specified in Section 33 90 15 HDPE.
F. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Restrained):
1. Yelomine: Certa-Lok Yelomine® Pipe by CertainTeed shall be as specified in Section 33 90 10 Yelomine Restrained Joint PVC Pipe. 2. C900: Certa-Lok C900/RJTM by CertainTeed shall be as specified in Section 33 90 05 C900 Restrained-Joint PVC Pipe.
2.2 STEEL CASING
A. Steel Casings for bored or jacked construction shall be steel pipe conforming to ASTM A139 with a minimum diameter as shown on the Drawings.
1. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the following table:
Diameter of Casing Nominal Wall Thickness (Inches) (Inches) Under Railroads All Other Uses 16 or less 0.312 0.188 18 0.312 0.250 20-24 0.375 0.250 26-36 0.500 0.312
2. Steel shall be Grade B under railroads and Grade A on all other uses. 3. Steel pipe shall have welded joints in accordance with AWWA C206.
B. Casing Spacers: Spacers shall be used with all casing. Casing spacers shall have a minimum of four (4) runners or one (1) runner for every diameter inch, whichever is greater and shall hold the carrier pipe in the center of the casing. Casing spacers shall be high-density polyethylene and shall be RACI or Approved Equal.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 4 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Casing End Seals: Ends shall be sealed with synthetic rubber, wrap-around end seals with stainless steel bands, Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Model CCES or Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Model AW or Approved Equal. Alternative concrete end seal may be used if included in detail drawings.
2.3 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Banded Couplings: Banded couplings shall be provided to transition between different pipe materials and sizes as required. Banded couplings for gravity sewer piping shall be synthetic rubber repair couplings with stainless steel clamping ring bands, reinforced with a stainless steel or a PVC shear guard sleeve. Banded coupling by GPK Products, Mission, Fernco coupling or Approved Equal.
B. Pipe to Structure Connections: Connectors shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C-923 and be matched to the outside diameter of the carrier pipe. The use of “Structure” includes manholes, valve vaults, wet wells or other sanitary sewer structures.
1. Flexible Entrance Seal: A flexible pipe to structure connector shall be used for gravity sanitary and drain pipe penetrations into precast concrete structures only. Flexible Entrance Seals shall be A-LOK Products Inc. A-LOK Connectors. 2. Rigid Entrance Seal: A rigid pipe to structure connector shall be used for field installations of all sanitary pressure pipe penetrations into concrete structures including mortared connections to precast or existing structures, field-poured concrete structures, and field- poured collars. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, Rigid Entrance Seals may be substituted for ductile iron wall pipe. A rigid pipe to structure connector shall also be used for field installations of sanitary gravity pipe penetrations into existing concrete structures only. The Rigid Entrance Seal shall be synthetic rubber with stainless steel take-up clamps. Rigid Entrance Seals shall be Press-Seal Gasket Corporation WS Series Waterstop Grouting Rings or Approved Equal.
C. Connection Saddles: Saddles for the connection of sewer service lateral pipe to PVC pipe, PVC Fold and Form pipe or Cast In Place Pipe (CIPP) shall be rigid, stainless steel banded, saddle type fittings of PVC plastic with a neoprene or synthetic rubber gasket fabricated specifically to the outer dimension of the sewer main pipe. All saddles shall be GPK Products, Multi-Fittings or approved equal.
D. Main Line Tapping Sleeve. Tapping sleeves for main lines under pressure shall be stainless steel. Therefore, the body, flange, bolts and nuts shall be made of 304 (18-8) stainless steel. The flange shall be recessed for tapping valve per MSS-SP60 and the flange outlet double welded inside and out. The sleeve will have a brass or stainless steel ¾” NPT test plug for pressure testing and a complete full circle rubber gasket to provide 360o pipe coverage permanently attached to the body. The sleeve shall be able to withstand 150 psi working pressure. All stainless steel tapping sleeves shall be Ford style FTSS, Mueller H-304, Romac style SST, Powerseal Model 3490 or approved equal.
E. Flange Adapters: Flange adapters shall be the cast iron slip-on type retained by set screws. Flange body shall be ductile iron, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Set screws shall be manufactured from AISI 4140 steel, heat treated to Rockwell C 42-50 and zinc plated. Set screws shall have break away torque heads. Flange adaptors shall conform to ANSI B16.1 for machining and drilling. Gaskets shall be standard mechanical joint gaskets, EPDM or Buna-N. All non-plated ferrous metal parts shall be shop primed with an epoxy primer, for finish painting in the field. Flange adaptors shall be Ford Meter Box Corporation UNI-Flange Series or Approved Equal.
F. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical Couplings shall be gasketed, sleeve-type, sized to properly fit the pipes to be joined, with steel or ductile iron middle ring, steel or ductile iron follower rings, and synthetic rubber gaskets. Gaskets shall be SBR, Buna-N, or EPDM. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be shop coated with an epoxy coating for corrosion resistance. All hardware shall be 300 series
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 5 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
stainless steel. Mechanical couplings shall be Ford Meter Box Style FC1, FC2a, FC3, or FC23, Dresser Style 38 or 162 or Rockwell 441 or 411.
G. Standard Pressure Gauge: Standard Pressure Gauges shall be installed for all pressure indication locations that are not for process variable measurement or connected to a control system.
1. Dial Size: Nominal 2½ inch diameter 2. Accuracy: 2 percent of span 3. Scale Range: As indicated in the Drawings or such that normal operating pressure lies between 50 and 80 percent of scale. 4. Connection: ¼ inch NPT through bottom, unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft Utility Gauge Series 1005 b. Marsh Standard Gauge Series c. Ametek U.S. Gauge Series P500 d. Acculite Series 2000
H. Pump and Equipment Flexible Connector: The Flexible Connectors shall be expansion/vibration joints of the single arch type of butyl rubber construction with carcass of high grade woven cotton or suitable synthetic fiber and individual solid steel ring reinforcement. Soft rubber fillers shall be integrally cured into the arches to provide a smooth flow path to prevent settling of material into the arch. Joints shall be constructed to pipeline size and to meet working pressures and corrosive conditions similar to the line where installed. Joints shall have full faced fabric reinforced butyl flanges integral with the body.
1. Split steel or ductile iron back-up rings shall be provided to ensure a good joint. Rings shall be designed for mating with ANSI Standard minimum 150 lb flanges. All joints shall be lined with Hypalon unless otherwise indicated. 2. All expansion/vibration joints shall be furnished with control (harness) units. Harness units shall consist of minimum two drilled plates, stretcher bolts and rubber washers backed by metal washers. The stretcher bolts shall prevent over-elongation of the joint. Extra nuts shall be provided on the stretcher bolts on the inside of the plate to prevent overcompression. All nuts, bolts and plates shall be galvanized. 3. The manufacturer of the expansion joints shall be a member of the Rubber Expansion Joint Division of the Fluid Sealing Association. Expansion joints shall be Garloc Style 204, Proco Style 231, Generel Rubber Corp. Style 1025 or Approved Equal.
I. Tracer Wire: Tracer Wire shall be #14 ga. Copper, THWN Insulation (white).
J. Tracer Wire Marker: Markers shall be 72” Trace-O-Flex Markers as manufactured by Carsonite Composites (or approved equal). Markers shall denote with appropriate lettering the proposed utility.
K. Pipe Insulation: Where indicated on the plans, pipe shall be encased with Foamglas cellular glass thermal insulation, ASTM C 552, 2” thick, jacketed with Pittwrap-stainless steel jacketing (016 thickness), as manufactured by Pittsburg Corning Corporation or approved equal. Implementation of pipe insulation shall adhere to manufacture’s recommendations.
L. Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape: Warning Tape shall be detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Tape shall be 6” wide and colored per industry standard with warning and identification imprinted in big black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall denote the proposed utility and read “CAUTION BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW” or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 6 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
2.4 EMBEDMENT
A. Granular embedment material for gravity sewer shall be a well-graded crushed gravel conforming to ASTM Designation C33, Gradation 7 (1/2 inch to No. 4) or Kansas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, 2007 Edition for coarse aggregate CA-4 or CA-5.
CA-4 CA-5 Sieve Size % Passing Sieve Size % Passing ¾” 100 ¾” 95-100 ½” 70-100 ½” - 3/8” 40-70 3/8” 40-70 No. 4 0-25 No. 4 - No. 8 0-5 No. 8 0-5
B. Concrete Encasement: Where indicated on the Drawings, concrete encasement shall be provided instead of the pipe embedment classes specified herein. Requirements for concrete encasement are detailed in the Drawings, Concrete and reinforcement shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00.
2.5 BACKFILL
A. Backfill materials shall be as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.
2.6 MANHOLES
A. Manhole materials shall be as specified in Section 03 41 00 Precast Structural Concrete Structures
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing conditions are as shown on the Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall verify the location and depth of all utilities a minimum of 24 hours prior to construction. The Contractor may utilize the toll free number for the “Kansas One Call System, Inc.” at 1-800-344-7233. This number is applicable anywhere within the state of Kansas. Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall notify all those companies which have facilities in the vicinity of the construction.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that are not to be removed or replaced from damage. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to protect all existing utilities from damage. If any utility is damaged through the carelessness or neglectful actions of the Contractor, the utility shall be repaired by its owner at the Contractor’s expense.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 7 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
B. Relocation of an existing utility which is within the public right-of-way shall be performed by the respective utility owner at no cost to the Contractor. Relocation and protection of an existing utility which is within a utility easement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Any private facilities damaged or disturbed by the Contractor’s work shall be repaired by the Contractor prior to close of the working day. Repairs shall be made in a manner sufficient to restore utility service to that property.
D. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping.
E. Protect all property or lot corner pins and stakes from damage or displacement. All property pins removed or damaged are to be reset by a Registered Land Surveyor at the Contractor’s expense.
F. Protect from damage or displacement all project benchmarks and existing structures within or adjacent to the construction limits that are not to be removed or demolished.
3.4 SEPARATION OF WATER AND SEWER UTILITIES
A. Gravity Sewer Lines laid Parallel to Water Lines: When potable water pipes and gravity sewers are laid parallel to each other, the horizontal distance between them shall be not less than 10 feet (3.0 m). The distance shall be measured from edge to edge. The laying of water pipes and sanitary sewers shall be in separate trenches with undisturbed earth between them. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 10 foot (3.0 m) separation, the engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods. Equivalent protection may require the sanitary sewer construction with one of the following additional protective features: concrete encasement, vacuum sewers, or jointless pipe such as fused HDPE or cured-in-place pipe liner.
B. Gravity Sewer Lines Crossing Water Lines: When a water pipe and a sanitary sewer cross and the sewer is 2 feet (0.6 m) or more (clear space) below the water pipe, no special requirements or limitations are provided herein. At all other crossings, the Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods. Equivalent protection may require the sanitary sewer to be constructed of one of the following materials (or approved equal) and pressure tested to assure water tightness pursuant to the most recent revision of KDHE’s Minimum Standards of Design of Water Pollution Control Facilities:
1. Ductile iron pipe conforming to ASTM A 536 or ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 with minimum thickness class 50, and gasketed, push on, or mechanical joints in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2. PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D3034 with minimum wall thickness of SDR41, ASTM F679, or ASTM F794, with gasketed push-on joints in conformance with ASTM D3212. 3. Reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C76 with gasketed joints in conformance with ASTM C361 or ASTM C443.
Joints in the sewer pipe shall be located as far as practical from the intersected water main. Joints in the Water pipe shall be located as far as practical from the intersected Sewer main.
Where a water main is laid across or through an area where there is an existing sanitary sewer that is not constructed of one of the above specified materials and is 2 ft. (0.6 m) or less below the water pipe, the existing sewer shall be encased in concrete with a minimum thickness of 6 inches (15.2 cm) for a 10 ft. (3.0 m) distance on each side of the crossing or the crossed section of sewer replaced to meet the above specified construction requirements. The above requirements shall also apply where a water main must cross under an existing sanitary sewer. In cases where it is not practical to maintain a 2 foot (0.6 m) separation, the contractor shall notify the Engineer, and the Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 8 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
C. Pressure Sewer Lines: When sewer force mains run parallel to water lines, the separation distance shall be as far as practical, but at least a 10 foot (3.0 m) horizontal separation shall be maintained. There shall be at least a 2 foot (0.6m) vertical separation at crossings with water main crossing above the sewer force main. In cases where it is not practical to maintain the required vertical or horizontal separation distance between a water line and a sanitary sewer force main, the Engineer will consult with KDHE to consider equivalent protection by other methods.
D. Sewer Connections: There are to be no physical connections between any parts of the potable water system with building sewers, sanitary sewers, or wastewater treatment facilities by means of which it would be possible for sewage, even under exceptional circumstances, to reach the wells, storage reservoirs, or distribution systems.
E. Sewer Manholes: No water pipe shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole.
F. Storm Sewers: The separation distance between a storm sewer (which is not a combined storm/sanitary sewer) and a water main should be based on geotechnical considerations. Required separation distances between water mains and combined storm/sanitary sewers are equivalent to those for water mains and gravity sanitary sewers.
G. Drains: Underground drains from fire hydrants or valve pits should not be directly connected to sanitary or storm drains.
H. Other Pollution Sources: It is of the utmost importance that potable water lines be protected from any source of pollution. The following shall pertain to instances where septic tanks, absorption fields, waste stabilization ponds, feedlots, or other sources of pollution are encountered.
1. A minimum distance of 25 feet shall be maintained between all potable water lines and all septic tanks or waste stabilization ponds. 2. Under no circumstances shall a water line extend through a septic tank absorption field or feedlot. All water lines shall be located a minimum of 25 feet from the furthest known extent of any sewage contamination. Under no condition will it be considered that encasement of the water main through an area of real or potential pollution would provided the protection needed to the water supply.
3.5 EMBEDMENT
A. Trenching and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving. Blasting will not be allowed unless approval by the Owner and Engineer is given.
B. Granular Bedding: Bottom of trench shall be overexcavated and the pipe shall be bedded with compacted granular material placed on a flat trench bottom and extending to an elevation 6 inches above the top of the pipe. The granular bedding shall have a minimum thickness of 4 inches under the barrel. Embedment over rock shall include an additional 2 inches below the pipe.
C. Place embedment material at the trench bottom with proper allowance for bell joints. Level materials in continuous layers not exceeding 4 inches in compacted depth. Shovel slicing of embedment shall be performed along the sides of the pipe as embedment is placed to consolidate the bedding and haunching below the pipe.
D. Consolidate granular embedment by rodding, spading and compacting as necessary to provide uniform pipe support.
E. Each lift of granular embedment material shall be compacted to a minimum 90% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D-698.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 9 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
F. Where shown on the Drawings, concrete encasement shall be provided instead of pipe embedment.
3.6 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All pipe shall be protected during transport, storage and installation from shock and free fall. Pipes shall be installed without cracking, chipping, breaking, bending or damaging the materials. Damaged pipe shall be replaced with new materials except when repairs are permitted by the Engineer. Use slings, lifting lugs, hooks and other protection devices during handling. A double sling shall be required when handling plastic pipe 10 feet or longer.
B. Install pipe of the size, material, strength class, and joint type as specified or indicated on the Drawings. Clean the interior of all pipe fittings and joints prior to installation.
C. Install gravity pipelines beginning with the lowest point of the pipeline and install pipe with the spigot or tongue end down stream. Install pressure pipelines with the bell ends facing the direction of laying, except when reverse laying is specifically authorized by the Engineer.
D. Laying of Pipe: All pipe shall be laid true to the alignment and grade indicated on the Drawings as staked by the Contractor. Laser Beam equipment is preferred for construction with checks on grade by survey equipment. Each pipe section shall be carefully inspected before it is laid and any section not conforming in all respects to the specifications shall be rejected. Any defective pipe inadvertently laid, shall on discovery at any time, be immediately removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Pipe laying shall proceed up grade beginning at the lower end of the sewer, the earth in the bottom of the trench shall be shaped to the required elevations so that the entire length of the pipe will rest firmly on the required pipeline bedding.
E. Pipe installation shall be in accordance with applicable standards, such as ASTM C-12, D-2321 and ANSI/AWWA C600, except where conflicts with this section occur, in which case this section shall govern.
F. Clean the interior of all pipe fittings and joints prior to installation. Protect pipe against the entrance of debris and foreign matter during discontinuance of installation and at the close of the working day by installing a close fitting plug at the open end. Plugs shall be water tight against heads up to 20 feet of water.
G. The Contractor shall take whatever means necessary to keep the trenches free of water and as dry as possible during pipe installation, bedding and jointing operations. No pipe shall be laid in water or under unsuitable trench conditions. Should unsuitable trench conditions be encountered, the Contractor shall halt work until the Engineer approves continuation of the work or alternate methods for continuation of the work.
H. Dewatering of Trench and Other Excavations: The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of all surface and ground water entering excavation, trenches and all other parts of the work. Each excavation shall be kept dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure is to be built, or the pipeline to be installed is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation or other causes will result. Sewer line in place shall not be used as drainage lines.
I. After each pipe has been brought to grade, aligned and placed in final position, place sufficient embedment material under the haunches and on each side of the pipe to hold the pipe in proper position during subsequent pipe jointing, bedding and backfilling operations. Compact embedment material to 90 percent maximum density by rodding, spading, or using suitable compaction
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 10 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
equipment. Place embedment material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of the pipe to prevent lateral displacement.
J. Pipe cutting shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe. Main taps for service saddle tees shall be made with a tapping tool specifically designed for that purpose. Cut edges shall be smoothed by power grinding to remove burrs and shape edges.
K. Pipe connection to structures:
1. Gravity Pipe connection to new structures shall be as shown on the Drawings. Where not shown on the Drawings, pipes shall be connected to new structures using flexible entrance seals. 2. Pipe connection to existing structures shall be made with two inches clearance surrounding the pipe or fitting. PVC pipe shall be fitted with a grouting ring. The opening between the pipe and structure shall be filled with non-shrink grout to form a water tight seal. 3. Pipe connections to existing structures shall be made in such manner that the finish work will conform to the essential applicable requirements specified for new structures.
3.7 PIPE JOINTING
A. Locate joints to provide for differential movement at changes in type of embedment, concrete collars and encasement and structures. Sewer main jointing shall be according to the following specifications:
1. Clean and lubricate all joint and gasket surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Examine all materials prior to installation for soundness and compliance with specifications. 3. Check joint position and condition after assembly prior to installing additional pipe sections. 4. Check joint opening and deflection for specification limits.
B. Threaded: Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT, and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed, after threading and before assembly, to remove all burrs.
1. Threaded joints, in plastic piping, shall be made up with Teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. At the option of the Contractor, threaded joints in other piping may be made up with Teflon thread tape, thread sealer or a suitable joint compound.
C. Solvent Welded: All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing operations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations and ASTM D-2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to the dimensions recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure testing, of solvent welded piping systems, shall not be performed until the applicable curing time, set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D- 2855, has elapsed.
D. Flanged: Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but not so tight as to fracture to distort the flanges. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. Connecting flanges shall have similar facings, i.e., flat or raised face.
E. Push-on: Gasket installation and other jointing operations shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Each spigot end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with a heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before the joint is completed. The interior surface of the bell and the exterior surface of the spigot shall be free of dust, dirt, gravel and other foreign material, both before and after the application of the lubricant sealer. The joint shall be connected by first brushing upon the matting surface the proper lubricant sealer as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, the spigot end shall then be
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 11 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
centered on grade into the bell end of the last downstream pipe length and shoved home and properly seated.
3.8 DUCTILE IRON PIPING
A. Handling: Pipe and fittings shall be handled and installed carefully to prevent damage to pipe material, lining and coatings. Hooks placed in ends of pipe or fittings shall have well-padded surfaces. All coatings which are damaged shall be repaired by the Contractor prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Cutting: Pipe shall be shop fabricated to the approximate lengths required. Pipe shall not be cut in the field, except where flange adapters or mechanical couplings are indicated o the Drawings or where allowed by the Engineer. Pipe may be cut with a portable saw, abrasive wheel or oxyacetylene torch. The use of hydraulic squeeze type cutters will not be permitted. Cuts shall be smooth, straight and at right angles to the pipe axis. Cut edges shall be dressed with a file or power grinder to remove all roughness and sharp edges.
C. Flanged Joints: Flange faces shall be machine faced with pipe end, flat and perpendicular to the pipe axis. When bolting flanged joints, care shall be taken to avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and uniformly, to ensure uniform compression of the gasket.
D. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints shall be assembled according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. If the joint does not form an effective seal, the joint shall be completely disassembled, thoroughly cleaned, and reassembled. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to the torque values listed in Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.
E. When noted in the Drawings, buried ductile iron pipe shall be provided with polyethylene tube protection installed in accordance with AWWA C105, Method A.
3.9 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Mechanical couplings: Mechanical couplings shall be carefully installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipe ends shall be separated by a space of at least ¼ inch but not more than 1 inch. Pipe and coupling surfaces which contact gaskets shall be clean and free from dirt during assembly. Following installation of the coupling, damaged areas of shop coatings on the pipe and couplings shall be repaired.
B. Wall Pipes: Where wall pipes with flanged or mechanical joint ends are installed, the bolt holes in the bell of the wall pipe shall straddle the top centerline of the casting. The top centerline shall be marked on the wall pipe at the foundry.
3.10 STEEL CASINGS FOR BORED OR JACKED CROSSINGS
A. When casing required in open trench for protection or other such use, the Installation shall be performed by a person experienced in such work. Casing shall be installed by lowering into the trench as required to assure the integrity of the casing. Alignment and gradient shall be such that the carrier conduit can be installed to the line and grade shown on the Drawings.
B. A pressure tight continuous circumferential weld shall join steel casing pipe sections. Conformance with welding procedures and work shall be in conformance with AWWA C206 and AWS Standards. All welding shall be done by electric arc welding. The assembly and welding procedures shall not produce objectionable distortions. No fitting up holes shall be used. Assembly devices may be
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 12 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
welded to parts to facilitate erection, but must be carefully removed after erection so as not to deface the metal surfaces.
C. After completion of the installation of the casing, the carrier conduit shall be carefully pushed or pulled through the casing in a manner that will maintain proper jointing of the pipe joints and provide the required gradient and alignment. Casing spacers shall be provided.
D. Casing Spacers: Casing spacers shall be provided for all casing pipe. Casing spacers shall be installed as per manufactures instructions and at no time shall exceed spacing as stated in manufacturer’s information. The ends of the casing shall be blocked with rubber end-seal or with concrete, as detailed on the project drawings.
3.11 JOINT RESTRAINT FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Joint restraint shall be provided for pressure piping. Joint restraint may be provided by concrete thrust blocking as detailed in the Drawings or by mechanically restrained joints as provided in Section 2.01.C.1.b of this Specification.
3.12 LOW PERMEABILITY TRENCH PLUGS FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Low permeability Trench Plugs shall be installed at 400’ intervals along the force main trench to prevent leak migration. The plugs shall be Select Material compacted to Mechanical Tamping standards according to Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving. The plugs shall be 5’ in length centered on the 400’ intervals.
3.13 ASSOCIATED SEWER LINE WORK
A. Tees: All tees shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
1. For new subdivisions where the lateral connections will be made later, all tees shall be closed by means of suitable stoppers held in place by some means of a watertight material. After tees are laid and before the trench is backfilled, a strip of wood long enough to extend from the top of the ground surface shall be inserted in the trench, secured in an upright position, and nailed to a stake driven into the side of the trench towards which the tee points. Care shall be taken to avoid disturbance of the markers during backfill operations. The Contractor, independent of the Engineer shall complete and submit to Engineer a written or tv inspection record of all tee connections measured to the nearest six (6) inches upstream from the manhole.
B. Tee Branch Risers: In locations as shown on the Drawings or as determined by the Engineer, risers shall be installed. Such risers shall be installed in the trench as vertical risers, in accordance with the drawings. The branch connection shall be set at 45º to the horizontal and a 45º bend shall be placed on the branch. The branch and bend shall be encased in concrete. The riser pipe shall be set into the 45º bend and extended up the trench wall to the appropriate depth. The wall of the ditch shall be recessed to contain at least one-half of the vertical riser pipe. The risers shall be installed in such a manner that: (1) they have solid bearing on undisturbed earth, (2) earth free of large particles shall be compacted around the risers to insure solid support. The top of the riser shall extend to within approximately eight (8) feet of the surface of the ground. Sealing, marking and recording of riser pipe shall be in accordance with that for Tees.
C. Laterals: Sewer laterals shall have a minimum slope of 2%. Laterals shall be connected to existing laterals to the extent shown on the plans. In locations where there are no existing laterals and a new lateral is required, the end of these laterals shall be plugged and a 2 X 4 board shall be installed
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 13 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
from the lateral end to three (3) feet above the finished ground. Also, a metal T-Post shall be placed alongside the 2 x 4 and placed 2 inches below the ground. The top of the board shall be painted red.
D. Drop for Manhole: Shall be constructed according to the details and dimensions shown on the drawings. The exterior piping for the drop shall be encased in concrete from the bottom of the manhole base to 6” above the top of the uppermost pipe. The concrete encasement shall extend horizontally around the drop pipe to a thickness equal to the diameter of the pipe in all directions. Drop manholes shall be built where a line enters a manhole at a greater than two (2) feet above invert of the manhole.
E. Cleanouts: When indicated on the Drawings, cleanouts shall be constructed at the terminating end of certain sewer lines with the cleanout 150' from the manhole or less. Cleanouts shall be constructed in compliance with the dimensions shown on the drawings. The entire cleanout shall rest on firm soil either natural undisturbed material or thoroughly compacted material. In no case shall any part of the cleanout rest on uncompacted fill material.
F. Sheeting and Bracing or Trench Boxes shall be provided in all trenches where required to insure maximum safety of workman. Sheeting may be wood or metal. Sheeting shall be driven to a depth of at least two feet below the pipe. Following installation of the pipe and backfill to at least two feet over the pipe, shoring shall be removed as backfilling procedures progress, but only when banks are stable and safe from caving or collapse. With Engineers approval, wooden sheeting shall be cut off at least two feet below ground level and the remainder left in place.
G. Sewer Line Cover: When the cover over the top of the sewer pipe is less than two and one-half (2½) feet, the sewer pipe shall be encased with concrete or Ductile iron pipe used. The concrete encasement shall be a minimum thickness of six (6) inches from the outside diameter of the pipe.
H. Standard Street Crossing: Whenever an improved driveway or street is crossed the surface shall be replaced after the trench has been backfilled and compacted. In lieu of backfill and compaction, flowable fill may be used as specified in the Drawings. A minimum of eight (8) inches of pavement shall be removed on either side of the trench. The outside pavement cut shall be a true line completed with a power saw. See Drawings for specific instructions at each standard street crossing. If the street or driveway crossing is existing gravel, a minimum thickness of 4” of AB-3 surfacing shall be placed.
I. Infiltration: If, at any time prior to expiration of the guarantee period, infiltration exceeds 250 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per mile of sewer per day, the Contractor shall locate the leaks and make repairs as necessary to control the infiltration.
J. Service Connections for Gravity Sewer Main Replacement: After the replacement pipe has been completely installed and tested, all existing active services as indicated on the Contract Drawings or identified by the Contractor shall be reconnected to the replacement pipe. All pipe that may have service connections shall use in line tees or wyes as shown in the Drawings and specified.
K. Tracer Wire:
1. All underground pressure pipes shall be marked by the use of a continuous trench indicator wire. The wire shall run in all locations and secured at terminating with properly sized wire nuts secured with electrical tape suitable for direct bury. 2. The tracer wire shall be installed directly above and attached to the pipe at a minimum of 3 times per 20’ length with 1½” polyethylene tape wrapped twice around the pipe. 3. If pipeline is to be bored under pavement or other areas, the beginning and end of the bored sections shall be marked and the wire installed. 4. Magnetic Warning tape shall be installed at the manufacturers recommended depth but not greater than 24” and shall be detectible at that depth.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 14 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
5. Maximum distance between terminating points for tracer wire shall be 500’.
L. Tracer Wire Markers: Tracer Wire Markers shall be installed at locations indicated in the drawings. Markers shall be installed to a depth of 24”. Markers shall be connected with properly sized wire nuts secured with electrical tape suitable for direct bury.
3.14 GRAVITY SEWER ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All new sewer segments which extend from manhole to manhole will be subject to acceptance testing under this subpart. Partial sewer main segment replacements and point repairs will not be tested under this subpart.
B. Visual Inspection
1. Clean pipe of excess mortar, joint sealant, dirt and debris prior to inspection. 2. Correct any misalignment, displaces or broken pipe; any visible infiltration or other defects as necessary prior to conducting leakage tests.
C. Air Leakage Test
1. Contractor shall perform air leakage tests for all pipe sizes. 2. Notification: Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance the scheduled time for testing. Resident Project Representative and/or Engineer shall be present for acceptance testing and approval. 3. Contractor shall furnish all facilities required for performance of the air leakage test, including but not limited to piping connections, pipe plugs with taps, test pumping equipments, pressure gauges, bulkheads and regulators to avoid over pressurization. The equipment and gauges shall meet the minimum specifications set forth in ASTM F-1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air. The air equipment shall consist of necessary valves and pressure gauges to control an oil-free air source and the rate at which air flows into the test section to enable monitoring of the air pressure within the test section. 4. Gauge certification from the manufacturer and calibration data shall be required for all pressure test gauges, a copy of which will be made available to the Engineer at the time the air tests are performed. 5. Test each reach of pipe between manholes after completion of pipe and appurtenance installation and trench backfill. 6. Plug ends of sewer line at manholes and cap or plug all lateral connections to withstand internal pressure. One plug shall have two taps for connection equipment. After connecting air control equipment to the air hose, begin increasing the air supply within the pipe section, monitoring the air pressure so that the internal pressure does not exceed 6.0 psig. 7. After the internal pressure reaches 4.0 psig, throttle the air supply to maintain between 4.0 and 3.5 psig for at least two minutes in order to reach equilibrium between air temperature and pipe walls. During this time, check all plugs for leaks. If leaks are found, bleed off air, tighten plugs and begin increasing the air supply again. 8. Air testing shall take place by the Time-Pressure Drop Method. Decrease the pressure to 3.5 psig and begin timing to determine the time required to achieve a pressure drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig. If the time, in seconds, to achieve the 1.0 psig pressure drop is greater than that shown in the following table, the line is presumed free of defects. For pipe sizes and lengths other than those shown in the table below, refer to ASTM F1417.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 15 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
Specification Time for Length Shown, min:s Pipe
Dia. Up to in. 150 ft. 200 ft. 250 ft. 300 ft. 350 ft. 400 ft. 450 ft. 100 ft.
4 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:46 3:42 3:46
6 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:24
8 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:34 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24
10 9:26 9:26 9:26 9:53 11:52 13:51 15:49 17:48 12 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38 15 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04 18 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
9. If the air test fails to meet the requirements, repair the defects and retest the line. All constructed sewer lines shall pass the low pressure air test prior to acceptance. 10. In areas where ground water is known to exist, install a one-half inch diameter capped pipe nipple, approximately 10" long, through manhole wall on top of one of the sewer lines entering the manhole. This shall be done at the time the sewer line is installed. Immediately prior to the performance of the line acceptance test, ground water level shall be determined by removing pipe cap, blowing air through pipe nipple into the ground so as to clear it, and then connecting a clear plastic tube to pipe nipple. The hose shall be held vertically and a measurement of height in feet of water shall be taken after the water stops rising in the plastic tube. The height in feet shall be divided by 2.3 to establish the pounds of pressure that will be added to all readings.
D. Deflection Test for Flexible and Semi-RigidSewer Pipe:
1. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall perform a diametrical deflection test on all flexible and semi-rigid pipe (such as PVC, HDPE plastic pipe, and truss pipe), for both open cut and trenchless construction. Tests shall be conducted between manholes for structures. Deflection testing of a segment of sewer shall occur at least thirty (30) days after the pipe has been installed and completely backfilled. 2. A mandrel with a diameter equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe to be tested shall be used. The mandrel shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with nine evenly spaced arms or prongs. Mandrels with fewer arms will be rejected as not sufficiently accurate. The mandrel shall be approved by the Engineer prior to testing pipe of each given size. The Contractor shall furnish proving rings for verifying the mandrel diameter. Contact length between points of contact on the mandrel arm shall be as follows:
Nominal Pipe Diameter Mandrel Length inches inches 8 8 10 10 12 10 15 12 18 15 3. The maximum allowable deflection shall be five (5) percent of the inside pipe diameter. Allowances for pipe wall thickness tolerances or ovality (from heat, shipping, poor production, etc.) shall not be deducted from the maximum allowable dimension of the mandrel, but shall be counted as part of the five (5) percent or lesser deflection allowance. 4. The mandrel shall be hand-pulled by the Contractor through all flexible sewer lines. Any section of sewer failing the diametrical deflection test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner, and retested.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 16 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
3.15 PRESSURE PIPING ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. All new sewer forcemains and pressure process piping will be subject to hydrostatic pressure testing under this subpart. Forcemains and pressure sewers shall be tested from the point of discharge to the isolation valves in the corresponding lift station(s). New segments of pipelines which will be connected to existing lines shall be pressure tested prior to connection.
B. Notification: Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the scheduled time for testing. Resident Project Representative and/or Engineer shall be present for acceptance testing and approval.
C. Test Conditions:
1. Test procedure shall be according to AWWA C 600 Section 4.1 2. Unless otherwise specified, a test pressure of not less than 1.5 times the normal operating pressure (for the lowest point on the pipe line) but not less than 150 pounds per square inch (psi) or not more than the rated working pressure for the pipe shall be used for testing. 3. The hydrostatic test shall be conducted for a minimum 2-hour duration. Test pressure shall not vary by more than ±5 psi for the duration of the test.
D. Test Materials: The Contractor shall furnish all pumps, piping, labor, plugs, hose, riser pipe, gauges and other materials and services necessary to bring the piping up to the specified test pressure. The contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner for use of City water supply from an existing fire hydrant.
E. Pressurization: Buried pipe in the section to be tested shall be backfilled or center loaded with thrust blocks installed. Interior pipe supports and restraint systems shall be completely installed prior to testing. The section of pipe shall be isolated and slowly filled with water. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the section of piping to be tested. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, corporation cocks shall be installed at such points so that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged or left in place as directed by the Engineer. The specified test pressure (based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge) shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. Valves shall no be operated in either the opening or closing direction at differential pressures above the rate pressure. The system will be allowed to stabilize at the test pressure before the leakage test is conducted.
F. Examination: All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints shall be inspected for moisture during the test. All evidence of moisture appearing on the surface of the ground during the test shall be investigated by the Contractor by excavation where the pipe has been covered with backfill. Evidence of moisture indicates defective materials or installation and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
G. Allowable Leakage – Ductile Iron: Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air has been expelled. Allowable leakage shall be according to the following equation, per AWWA C 600.
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 17 BG Consultants, Inc. City of Hutchinson 171377H | Hutchinson Zoo Education Building
Q=SD(P)2 /133200,
Where Q - Total allowable leakage in one hour, gallons. S - Length of section tested, feet. D - Nominal pipe diameter, inches. P - Test pressure, psi
H. Allowable Leakage – PVC: Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air has been expelled. Allowable leakage shall be according to the following equation, per AWWA C 605.
I. Acceptance of Installation: Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of allowable leakage. If any test of pipe section discloses leakage greater than that specified above, repairs or replacements shall be accomplished in accordance with the specifications. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage. The pressure test shall be repeated after repairing leaks and other defective work until the pipeline installation conforms to specified requirements and is accepted by the Engineer.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction and soil testing will be performed in accordance with Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving
END OF SECTION 33 31 13
PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY PIPING 33 31 13 - 18